WO2022207002A1 - 无线通信方法和装置 - Google Patents

无线通信方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022207002A1
WO2022207002A1 PCT/CN2022/085193 CN2022085193W WO2022207002A1 WO 2022207002 A1 WO2022207002 A1 WO 2022207002A1 CN 2022085193 W CN2022085193 W CN 2022085193W WO 2022207002 A1 WO2022207002 A1 WO 2022207002A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
resource
pattern
frequency domain
information
indication
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2022/085193
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
袁世通
刘凤威
宋兴华
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to JP2023560649A priority Critical patent/JP2024513055A/ja
Priority to BR112023019872A priority patent/BR112023019872A2/pt
Priority to EP22779182.9A priority patent/EP4307805A4/en
Priority to KR1020237037223A priority patent/KR102949882B1/ko
Publication of WO2022207002A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022207002A1/zh
Priority to US18/475,448 priority patent/US20240032004A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/14—Relay systems
    • H04B7/15—Active relay systems
    • H04B7/155—Ground-based stations
    • H04B7/15528—Control of operation parameters of a relay station to exploit the physical medium
    • H04B7/15542—Selecting at relay station its transmit and receive resources
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A) or DMT
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signalling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0058—Allocation criteria
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signalling for the administration of the divided path, e.g. signalling of configuration information
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453—Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H04W72/232—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal the control data signalling from the physical layer, e.g. DCI signalling
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00—Network topologies
    • H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/04—Large scale networks; Deep hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/042—Public Land Mobile systems, e.g. cellular systems
    • H04W84/047—Public Land Mobile systems, e.g. cellular systems using dedicated repeater stations
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0058—Allocation criteria
    • H04L5/0062—Avoidance of ingress interference, e.g. ham radio channels
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/14—Two-way operation using the same type of signal, i.e. duplex
    • H04L5/1469—Two-way operation using the same type of signal, i.e. duplex using time-sharing

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more particularly, to a wireless communication method and apparatus.
  • the access network equipment realizes the connection between the terminal equipment and the core network through optical fibers.
  • the deployment cost of optical fibers is very high. Therefore, the integrated access and backhaul node (IAB) technology can be used to realize the connection with the core network through the wireless backhaul link between the relay equipment and the access network equipment, so as to avoid Higher costs due to the large number of fiber deployments.
  • IAB integrated access and backhaul node
  • the resource configuration of the relay node is redundant and complex, and the configuration overhead and the overhead of dynamically indicating resources are too large. Therefore, how to configure the resources of the relay node to reduce configuration complexity and signaling overhead is an urgent problem to be solved at present.
  • the present application provides a wireless communication method and device, which can implement resource configuration for relay nodes, reduce the complexity of resource configuration, and reduce signaling overhead.
  • a wireless communication method comprising: receiving first information, the first information including indication information of a first pattern, the first pattern being one of a plurality of patterns, each of the plurality of patterns
  • the patterns are used to indicate the distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain, and the at least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource, and the first resource is definitely available resource, the second resource is an unavailable resource, whether the third resource is available is determined by the first indication information, the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein the resource distribution indicated by any two patterns is different ; communicate with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern.
  • the third resource when the first network device does not send the first indication information, the third resource is not available for the default DU cell.
  • the present application is applicable to a wireless communication system including a relay node, wherein the relay node may be an IAB node, or may also be a terminal device, that is, a terminal device with a wireless relay function.
  • the relay node may be an IAB node, or may also be a terminal device, that is, a terminal device with a wireless relay function.
  • whether the first resource, the second resource, and the third resource are available may be configured for a cell of a distributed unit (DU) of the first node, or may be configured for a distributed unit of the first node.
  • DU distributed unit
  • bandwidth part Part of the bandwidth part (bandwidth part, BWP) is configured, or is configured for part of the frequency domain resources of the distributed unit DU of the first node, for example, the frequency domain resource block group (resource block group, RBG) is configured, the first network The device is an upper-level node of the first node, and the second network device is a lower-level node of the first node.
  • bandwidth part BWP
  • RBG resource block group
  • the first resource can be the frequency domain H resource (hard), indicating that the DU cell must be available in the frequency domain; the second resource can be the frequency domain NA resource (not available), indicating that the DU cell is unavailable.
  • Resources the resources available to the mobile terminal (mobile-termination, MT) at this time; the third resource can be the frequency domain S resource (soft), indicating whether the DU cell is available for the resource needs to be determined according to the indication information sent by the upper node.
  • whether the S resource is available after being further indicated may be determined as “available” or “unavailable”, or may be determined as “available” or “not indicated as available”.
  • the indication of availability may be configured for one or more of three TDD transmission direction configurations of uplink, downlink, and flexible.
  • the uplink resource of S is indicated by signaling to indicate that it is available, and the downlink and flexible resources do not indicate that it is available, and so on.
  • the first node when the at least one resource is the first resource, the first node can communicate with the terminal device and/or the lower-level relay node; when the at least one resource is the second resource, the first node cannot.
  • the first node can communicate with the first network device; when the at least one resource is a third resource, the first node needs to determine whether the third resource can be used to communicate with the terminal device according to the indication of the first network device and/or subordinate relay nodes.
  • communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern includes: determining, according to the first pattern, resources for the first node to communicate with the second network device and/or the terminal device,
  • the first node is a relay node.
  • the resource types included in each pattern include at least one of certain availability, unavailable, and availability depends on further indications from the upper-level node, and
  • the first pattern is indicated by the first information, and the first pattern is used to implement communication between the network device and the first node and/or the terminal device.
  • the network for example, the donor base station and the IAB node
  • the terminal device for example, the UE
  • the signal and channel resources under several bandwidths are allocated to avoid excessive signaling overhead due to the complicated configuration of frequency division resources, and the UE itself may not support the burden of saving too many resource configurations. Therefore, frequency division resources If the configuration is not too flexible, it can reduce signaling overhead and improve system performance.
  • the IAB can report to the donor base station: when the frequency division (or frequency division pattern) is configured, the constraints for determining the size of the guard band include: the relationship between the guard band and the DU or MT bandwidth; The relationship between the guard band and the transmission timing mode; the relationship between the guard band and the synchronization state, etc.
  • reporting of the IAB to the donor base station may occur before the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB, or it may occur after the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB.
  • the donor base station first configures a set of configurations, and after receiving it, the IAB finds that it does not meet the guard band requirements or its hardware capabilities, so it triggers the IAB to report these constraints. condition.
  • case1 timing mode requires the IAB node DU to send the same time as other nodes including the Donor node, which meets the inter-station synchronization requirements of the TDD system; the case 6 timing mode is used for space division transmission; the case 7 timing mode is used for space division reception, and it is also possible Used for upstream full duplex.
  • timing type 2 and timing type 3 specify the rules for determining uplink transmission timing of the MT of the IAB node.
  • the uplink transmission timing of the MT is related to the downlink transmission timing of the DU.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU may be determined according to any method.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be aligned with the downlink transmission timing of the IAB donor node.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be instructed and adjusted by the upper node based on over-the-air synchronization (OTA synchronization), or the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be based on the global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS). ), or obtained from other systems that support timing, such as the global navigation satellite system (GNSS) or Beidou.
  • OTA synchronization over-the-air synchronization
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • Beidou Beidou
  • timing modes implicitly represent transmission modes, and the required guard band sizes may be different.
  • full duplex generally requires more guard bands than space division multiplexing.
  • frequency division multiplexing is used in order to increase the isolation between MT and DU during space division transmission or space division reception.
  • frequency division multiplexing can be performed when the above-mentioned timing mode case and timing mode case are adopted.
  • the configuration constraints of the frequency division may be reported to the donor base station by the protocol definition or the IAB.
  • the resource block (RB) of the lowest frequency point of the DU cell, the RB of the highest frequency point of the DU cell, the DU cell frequency division, including at least the initial part of the bandwidth (initial BWP), after the DU cell frequency division cannot After there are discontinuous frequency domain resources and DU cell frequency division, it is divided into X continuous frequency domain resources at most, starting from the lowest frequency point of DU cell, and consecutive X RBs and the highest frequency point of DU cell downward, X RBs in a row and so on.
  • communication is performed with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern.
  • the method before receiving the first information, the method further includes: receiving configuration information.
  • the configuration information may refer to the configuration information described in the twelfth aspect or the thirteenth aspect below.
  • the first time domain resource here may be understood as a set of time resources, the first time domain resource may include one or more time slots, and the multiple time slots may be continuous time slots or discontinuous time slots .
  • the one or more time slots are mapped with a first pattern for communication between the first node and the second network device and/or the terminal device.
  • different frequency-domain resource patterns may be mapped on one or more time slots of the first time-domain resource.
  • the first time domain resource may also include one or more symbols, and the present application does not limit the time granularity.
  • second information is received, where the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource.
  • the multiple patterns are configured by a donor network device, that is, the configuration information of one or more patterns sent by the donor network device is received.
  • the configuration information of the one or more patterns may be configured by the host network device one or more times, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the host network device before the host network device configures the multiple patterns, the host network device receives frequency division multiplexing configuration information sent from the first node, the frequency division multiplexing configuration information
  • the information includes constraints on the configuration of the plurality of patterns.
  • the multiple patterns may also be predefined by a protocol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the configuration of each pattern includes a frequency domain resource bandwidth of at least one resource, and each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and any two pattern identification information different.
  • each pattern further includes a frequency domain resource attribute of at least one resource, and each frequency domain resource attribute is the first resource, the second resource A resource, one of the third resource.
  • protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources may indicate that the attributes of the multi-segment frequency-domain resources are H/S/NA, and/or the protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources of various lengths.
  • each set includes continuous frequency domain resources
  • the corresponding frequency domain resources can be selected. Domain resources are mapped into a three-segment pattern.
  • the protocol when the protocol only defines a frequency domain resource pattern of one length, such as a pattern with five segments in the frequency domain, then only the resources of the first three resource attributes in each pattern need to be mapped, that is, the The first three resource attributes correspond to the availability of each segment of the resource.
  • the configuration of the frequency domain resource bandwidth includes a starting resource block number of at least one resource and a number of resource blocks of at least one resource.
  • the frequency domain resource bandwidth is configured by the host network device, or the frequency domain resource bandwidth is predefined by a protocol.
  • the DU calculates the actually indicated bandwidth based on the bandwidth actually used by the cell. This application does not limit this.
  • each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and through the identification of the pattern, the frequency domain size of each resource in the corresponding frequency domain resource pattern and the frequency domain attribute corresponding to each resource can be determined.
  • the SLIV is configured based on the start and length indications of the frequency domain resources, the start and duration lengths of the frequency domain bandwidth resources are predefined by the protocol, and the indexes of the start and end frequency domain resources of the scheduled frequency domain resources are mapped. That is, the network device can determine the starting resource block number and the number of resource blocks of the corresponding frequency domain resource through the index value, thereby configuring the frequency domain length of the frequency domain H//S/NA.
  • the first information includes identification information of at least one pattern set, and the identification information of the at least one pattern set is used to determine at least one target pattern set, the at least one target pattern set.
  • the pattern set includes the first pattern, wherein the configuration of each pattern set includes at least one pattern in the plurality of patterns, and each pattern set has corresponding pattern set identification information, and the identification information of any two pattern sets is different.
  • third information is received, where the third information is used to configure at least one first time slot; and at least one first pattern is mapped on the at least one first time slot .
  • the first time slot is a time slot within a first time domain period, or the first time slot is a time domain resource within the first time domain period Time slots corresponding to four resources, wherein the first time domain period corresponds to the period configured by the first time domain resource, and whether the fourth resource is available is determined by second indication information, and the second indication information is the first time domain period. sent by the network device.
  • the first time slot may also be all time slots in the first time domain period.
  • the first time slot here may be a non-TDM time slot, or directly referred to as an FDM time slot.
  • This application does not limit the specific name of the first time slot. Part of the time slot configuration frequency division resource configuration.
  • the present application does not limit the number of first time slots supporting this function.
  • first time slot is only an implementation manner of the time granularity, and the first symbol and the like may also be determined in the first time period, and the present application does not limit the specific time granularity.
  • the first period may correspond to the period of the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration of the first period, or a period may be configured separately, and the unit is the number of time slots, or absolute time, or a system may be used.
  • a frame is one period, and the present application does not limit the manner of determining the first period.
  • the first time period and/or the total number of time slots in the first period are determined according to the subcarrier spacing; according to the number of the first time slot and/or The numbered set of the first time slot determines the number of time slots corresponding to the first time slot.
  • the DU calculates the number of time slots in the first cycle according to the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration cycle and the configured subcarrier spacing, and determines which time slots are based on the number of the first time slot. is a non-TDM time slot.
  • the total number of time slots in the period is determined by taking the subcarrier spacing of the initial partial bandwidth BWP of the cell of the DU as a reference. Because under a given subcarrier interval, the total number of time slots in the system frame is fixed.
  • the referenced subcarrier spacing may be configured independently, or refer to the configuration of existing subcarrier spacing in other signaling or other application scenarios with reference to other current protocols, which is not limited in this application.
  • the number of the at least one pattern is the same as the number of the first time slot, or the number of the at least one pattern is a positive integer of the number of the first time slot times, or the number of the at least one pattern is less than the number of the first time slot.
  • the radio frequency domain resource H/S/NA when the radio frequency domain resource H/S/NA is mapped in the first time slot, different frequency domain resource patterns may be mapped to the first time slot.
  • the frequency domain H resource is mapped to the first time slot, or on the basis of the resource configuration, the frequency domain resource NA is mapped to the first time slot, at this time, the frequency domain NA resource covers the frequency domain.
  • the domain H resource that is, the availability of the frequency domain resource of the DU of the first node on the first time slot changes from a certain available resource to an unavailable resource. That is, H/S/NA resources can be arbitrarily combined in the mapping of radio frequency domain resources from time domain resources, which is not limited in this application, and is specifically subject to the communication requirements between the network device and the first node and/or terminal device.
  • any one of the frequency domain resources H/S/NA can be mapped in the first time slot; or S+NA, that is, after the frequency domain S resource is first mapped in the first time slot, then according to further indication information
  • the S resource shows the radio frequency domain resource NA; or S+H, H+NA, S+H+NA, etc.
  • the application does not limit the mapping method of the resource.
  • the same frequency domain resource eg, frequency domain H resource
  • fourth information is received, where the fourth information is used to indicate resource availability of the third resource.
  • the fourth information is further used to indicate the resource availability of the fourth resource, that is, the resource whose domain resource attribute is S.
  • fifth information is received, where the fifth information is used to indicate grouping information of frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time slot; sixth information is received, the sixth message Resource attribute used to indicate at least one frequency domain resource group.
  • the granularity and manner of frequency domain resource division may be RBG, the number of RBs, or partial bandwidth BWP, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • a first relationship and/or a second relationship is acquired, where the first relationship is a correspondence between the first parameter and the indication information of the availability of the first resource, the The first relationship is used to indicate the resource availability of the first time slot, the second relationship is a corresponding relationship between the second parameter and the indication information of the second resource availability, and the second relationship is used to indicate the frequency domain of the first time slot Resource availability of a resource; a first pattern is determined from the first relationship and/or the second relationship.
  • first relationship and the second relationship may indicate the availability of all time-domain resources and the availability of all frequency-domain resources, and/or may indicate the first time slot, that is, the resources of the time slot requiring frequency division multiplexing availability, and/or may indicate the availability of frequency domain resources of the first time slot, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • seventh information is received, where the seventh information includes identification information of at least one indication set, and the identification information of the at least one indication set is used to determine at least one target indication set , the at least one target indication set includes a first parameter and/or a second parameter, wherein the identification information of any two indication sets is different; according to the at least one target indication set, one or more frequencies of at least one first time slot are determined.
  • Resource properties for domain resources include identification information of at least one indication set, and the identification information of the at least one indication set is used to determine at least one target indication set , the at least one target indication set includes a first parameter and/or a second parameter, wherein the identification information of any two indication sets is different; according to the at least one target indication set, one or more frequencies of at least one first time slot are determined.
  • the bearing methods such as the indication information and configuration information involved may be, but are not limited to: one or at least two of radio resource control signaling, medium access control MAC layer signaling, and physical layer PHY signaling
  • the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control RRC signaling; the MAC layer signaling includes: MAC control element (control element, CE); the physical layer signaling includes: downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) and the like.
  • a wireless communication method comprising: sending first information, the first information including indication information of a first pattern, the first pattern being one of a plurality of patterns, each of the plurality of patterns
  • the patterns are used to indicate the distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain, and the at least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource, and the first resource is definitely available resource, the second resource is an unavailable resource, whether the third resource is available is determined by the first indication information, the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein the resource distribution indicated by any two patterns is different ; communicate with a first node and/or a terminal device according to the first pattern, where the first node is a relay node.
  • the third resource when the first network device does not send the first indication information, the third resource is not available for the default DU cell.
  • the present application is applicable to a wireless communication system including a relay node, wherein the relay node may be an IAB node, or may also be a terminal device, that is, a terminal device with a wireless relay function.
  • the first resource, the second resource, and the third resource may be configured for the cell of the distributed unit DU of the first node, or configured for the partial bandwidth BWP of the distributed unit of the first node or configured for part of the frequency domain resources of the distributed unit DU of the first node, such as RBG
  • the first network device is the upper-level node of the first node
  • the second network device is the lower-level node of the first node node.
  • the first resource can be the frequency domain H resource (hard), indicating that the DU cell must be available in the frequency domain; the second resource can be the frequency domain NA resource (not available), indicating that the DU cell is unavailable.
  • Resources the resources available to the mobile terminal MT at this time; the third resource may be the frequency domain S resource (soft), indicating whether the DU cell is available for the resource needs to be determined according to the indication information sent by the upper node.
  • whether the S resource is available after being further indicated may be determined as “available” or “unavailable”, or may be determined as “available” or “not indicated as available”.
  • the indication of availability may be configured for one or more of three TDD transmission direction configurations of uplink, downlink, and flexible.
  • the uplink resource of S is indicated by signaling to indicate that it is available, and the downlink and flexible resources do not indicate that it is available, and so on.
  • the first node when the at least one resource is the first resource, the first node can communicate with the terminal device and/or the subordinate node; when the at least one resource is the second resource, the first node cannot communicate with the terminal device. device to communicate, the first node can communicate with the first network device; when the at least one resource is a third resource, the first node needs to determine whether the third resource can be used to communicate with the terminal device and/or according to the indication of the first network device or lower relay nodes to communicate.
  • the communication with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern includes: determining the resources for the network device to communicate with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern, the first Nodes are relay nodes.
  • the resource types included in each pattern include at least one of certain availability, unavailable, and availability depends on further indications from the upper-level node, and
  • the first pattern is indicated by the first information, and the first pattern is used to implement communication between the network device and the first node and/or the terminal device.
  • the network for example, the donor base station and the IAB node
  • the terminal device for example, the UE
  • the signal and channel resources under several bandwidths are allocated to avoid excessive signaling overhead due to the complicated configuration of frequency division resources, and the UE itself may not support the burden of saving too many resource configurations. Therefore, frequency division resources If the configuration is not too flexible, it can reduce signaling overhead and improve system performance.
  • the IAB can report to the donor base station: when the frequency division (or frequency division pattern) is configured, the constraints for determining the size of the guard band include: the relationship between the guard band and the DU or MT bandwidth; The relationship between the guard band and the transmission timing mode; the relationship between the guard band and the synchronization state, etc.
  • reporting of the IAB to the donor base station may occur before the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB, or it may occur after the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB.
  • the donor base station first configures a set of configurations, and after receiving it, the IAB finds that it does not meet the guard band requirements or its hardware capabilities, so it triggers the IAB to report these constraints. condition.
  • case1 timing mode requires the IAB node DU to send the same time as other nodes including the Donor node, which meets the inter-station synchronization requirements of the TDD system; the case 6 timing mode is used for space division transmission; the case 7 timing mode is used for space division reception, and it is also possible Used for upstream full duplex.
  • timing type 2 and timing type 3 specify the rules for determining uplink transmission timing of the MT of the IAB node.
  • the uplink transmission timing of the MT is related to the downlink transmission timing of the DU.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU may be determined according to any method.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be aligned with the downlink transmission timing of the IAB donor node.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be instructed and adjusted by the upper node based on OTA synchronization signaling, or the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be obtained based on the global positioning system GPS, or based on the global navigation satellite system GNSS or BeiDou, etc. Obtain from other systems that support timing.
  • timing modes implicitly represent transmission modes, and the required guard band sizes may be different.
  • full duplex generally requires more guard bands than space division multiplexing.
  • frequency division multiplexing is used in order to increase the isolation between MT and DU during space division transmission or space division reception.
  • frequency division multiplexing can be performed when the above-mentioned timing mode case and timing mode case are adopted.
  • the configuration constraints of the frequency division may be reported to the donor base station by the protocol definition or the IAB.
  • RB of the lowest frequency point of DU cell RB of the highest frequency point of DU cell
  • DU cell frequency division including at least the initial part of the bandwidth
  • DU cell frequency division there can be no discontinuous frequency domain resources
  • DU cell frequency After dividing, it is divided into X segments of continuous frequency domain resources at most, starting from the lowest frequency point of the DU cell, consecutive X RBs, down from the highest frequency point of the DU cell, consecutive X RBs, and so on.
  • communicating with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern includes: in the first time domain resource, communicating with the first node according to the first pattern with the first node and/or terminal equipment.
  • the first time domain resource here may be understood as a set of time resources, the first time domain resource may include one or more time slots, and the multiple time slots may be continuous time slots or discontinuous time slots .
  • the one or more time slots are mapped with a first pattern for communication between the first node and the second network device and/or the terminal device.
  • different frequency-domain resource patterns may be mapped on one or more time slots of the first time-domain resource.
  • the first time domain resource may also include one or more symbols, and the present application does not limit the time granularity.
  • second information is sent, where the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource.
  • the multiple patterns are configured by a donor network device, that is, receiving configuration information of one or more patterns sent by the donor network device.
  • the configuration information of the one or more patterns may be configured by the host network device one or more times, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the host network device before the host network device configures the multiple patterns, the host network device receives the frequency division multiplexing configuration information sent from the first node, the frequency division multiplexing configuration information
  • the information includes constraints on the configuration of the plurality of patterns.
  • the multiple patterns may also be predefined by a protocol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the configuration of each pattern includes the frequency domain resource bandwidth of the at least one resource, wherein each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and any two patterns identify Information is different.
  • the configuration of each pattern further includes a frequency domain resource attribute of at least one resource, and each frequency domain resource attribute is the first resource, the second A resource, one of the third resource.
  • protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources may indicate that the attributes of the multi-segment frequency-domain resources are H/S/NA, and/or the protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources of various lengths.
  • each set includes continuous frequency domain resources
  • the corresponding frequency domain resources can be selected. Domain resources are mapped into a three-segment pattern.
  • the protocol when the protocol only defines a frequency domain resource pattern of one length, such as a pattern with five segments in the frequency domain, then only the resources of the first three resource attributes in each pattern need to be mapped, that is, the The first three resource attributes correspond to the availability of each segment of the resource.
  • the configuration of the frequency domain resource bandwidth includes a starting resource block number of the at least one resource and a number of resource blocks of the at least one resource.
  • the frequency domain resource bandwidth is configured by the host network device, or the frequency domain resource bandwidth is predefined by the protocol.
  • the DU calculates the actually indicated bandwidth based on the bandwidth actually used by the cell. This application does not limit this.
  • each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and through the identification of the pattern, the frequency domain size of each resource in the corresponding frequency domain resource pattern and the frequency domain attribute corresponding to each resource can be determined.
  • the SLIV is configured based on the start and length indications of the frequency domain resources, the start and duration lengths of the frequency domain bandwidth resources are predefined by the protocol, and the indexes of the start and end frequency domain resources of the scheduled frequency domain resources are mapped. That is, the network device can determine the starting resource block number and the number of resource blocks of the corresponding frequency domain resource through the index value, thereby configuring the frequency domain length of the frequency domain H//S/NA.
  • the first information includes identification information of at least one pattern set, and the identification information of the at least one pattern set is used to determine at least one target pattern set, the at least one target pattern set.
  • the pattern set includes the first pattern, wherein the configuration of each pattern set includes at least one pattern in the plurality of patterns, and each pattern set has corresponding pattern set identification information, and the identification information of any two pattern sets is different.
  • third information is sent, where the third information is used to configure at least one first time slot; at least one first pattern is mapped on the at least one first time slot .
  • the first time slot is a time slot within a first time domain period, or the first time slot is a time domain resource within the first time domain period Time slots corresponding to four resources, wherein the first time domain period corresponds to the period configured by the first time domain resource, and whether the fourth resource is available is determined by second indication information, and the second indication information is the first time domain period. sent by the network device.
  • the first time slot may also be all time slots in the first time domain period.
  • the first time slot here may be a non-TDM time slot, or directly referred to as an FDM time slot.
  • This application does not limit the specific name of the first time slot.
  • the first time slot only supports one function, that is, it is allowed to be Part of the time slot configuration frequency division resource configuration.
  • the present application does not limit the number of first time slots supporting this function.
  • first time slot is only an implementation manner of the time granularity, and the first symbol and the like may also be determined in the first time period, and the present application does not limit the specific time granularity.
  • the first period may correspond to the period of the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration of the first period, or a period may be configured separately, and the unit is the number of time slots, or absolute time, or a system may be used.
  • a frame is one period, and the present application does not limit the manner of determining the first period.
  • the first time period and/or the total number of time slots in the first period are determined according to the subcarrier spacing; according to the number of the first time slot and/or The numbered set of the first time slot determines the number of time slots corresponding to the first time slot.
  • the DU calculates the number of time slots in the first cycle according to the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration cycle and the configured subcarrier spacing, and determines which time slots are based on the number of the first time slot. is a non-TDM time slot.
  • the total number of time slots in the period is determined by taking the subcarrier spacing of the initial partial bandwidth BWP of the cell of the DU as a reference. Because under a given subcarrier interval, the total number of time slots in the system frame is fixed.
  • the referenced subcarrier spacing may be configured independently, or refer to the configuration of existing subcarrier spacing in other signaling or other application scenarios with reference to other current protocols, which is not limited in this application.
  • the number of the at least one pattern is the same as the number of the first time slot, or the number of the at least one pattern is a positive integer of the number of the first time slot times, or the number of the at least one pattern is less than the number of the first time slot.
  • the radio frequency domain resource H/S/NA when the radio frequency domain resource H/S/NA is mapped in the first time slot, different frequency domain resource patterns may be mapped to the first time slot.
  • the frequency domain H resource is mapped to the first time slot, or on the basis of the resource configuration, the frequency domain resource NA is mapped to the first time slot, at this time, the frequency domain NA resource covers the frequency domain.
  • the domain H resource that is, the availability of the frequency domain resource of the DU of the first node on the first time slot changes from a certain available resource to an unavailable resource. That is, H/S/NA resources can be arbitrarily combined in the mapping of radio frequency domain resources from time domain resources, which is not limited in this application, and is specifically subject to the communication requirements between the network device and the first node and/or terminal device.
  • any one of the frequency domain resources H/S/NA can be mapped in the first time slot; or S+NA, that is, after the frequency domain S resource is mapped in the first time slot, and then according to further indication information
  • the radio frequency domain resource NA; or S+H, H+NA, S+H+NA, etc., are displayed on the S resource, and the application does not limit the resource mapping manner.
  • the same frequency domain resource eg, frequency domain H resource
  • fourth information is sent, where the fourth information is used to indicate resource availability of the third resource.
  • the fourth information is further used to indicate the resource availability of the fourth resource, that is, the resource whose domain resource attribute is S.
  • fifth information is sent, where the fifth information is used to indicate grouping information of frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time slot; sixth information is sent, the sixth message Resource attribute used to indicate at least one frequency domain resource group.
  • the granularity and manner of frequency domain resource division may be RBG, the number of RBs, or partial bandwidth BWP, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • a first relationship and/or a second relationship is acquired, where the first relationship is a correspondence between the first parameter and the indication information of the availability of the first resource, the The first relationship is used to indicate the resource availability of the first time slot, the second relationship is a corresponding relationship between the second parameter and the indication information of the second resource availability, and the second relationship is used to indicate the frequency domain of the first time slot Resource availability of a resource; a first pattern is determined from the first relationship and/or the second relationship.
  • first relationship and the second relationship may indicate the availability of all time-domain resources and the availability of all frequency-domain resources, and/or may indicate the first time slot, that is, the resources of the time slot requiring frequency division multiplexing availability, and/or may indicate the availability of frequency domain resources of the first time slot, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • seventh information is sent, where the seventh information includes identification information of at least one indication set, and the identification information of the at least one indication set is used to determine at least one target indication set , the at least one target indication set includes a first parameter and/or a second parameter, wherein the identification information of any two indication sets is different; according to the at least one target indication set, one or more frequencies of at least one first time slot are determined.
  • Resource properties for domain resources are determined.
  • the bearing methods such as the indication information and configuration information involved may be, but are not limited to: one or at least two of radio resource control signaling, medium access control MAC layer signaling, and physical layer PHY signaling The combination.
  • the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control RRC signaling;
  • the MAC layer signaling includes: MAC control element CE;
  • the physical layer signaling includes: downlink control information DCI and the like.
  • a wireless communication device comprising: a transceiver unit configured to receive first information, where the first information includes indication information of a first pattern, the first pattern is one of a plurality of patterns, the plurality of patterns Each of the patterns is used to indicate the distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain, and the at least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource, the first resource The resource is a certain available resource, the second resource is an unavailable resource, and whether the third resource is available is determined by the first indication information, the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein any two patterns are The indicated resource distributions are different; the processing unit is used to determine the resources for communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern; the transceiver unit is also used for the first node and the second network device and/or or the terminal device to communicate.
  • the processing unit is used to determine the resources for communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern
  • the third resource when the first network device does not send the first indication information, the third resource is not available for the default DU cell.
  • the present application is applicable to a wireless communication system including a relay node, wherein the relay node may be an IAB node, or may also be a terminal device, that is, a terminal device with a wireless relay function.
  • the first resource, the second resource, and the third resource may be configured for the cell of the distributed unit DU of the first node, or configured for the partial bandwidth BWP of the distributed unit of the first node or configured for part of the frequency domain resources of the distributed unit DU of the first node, such as RBG
  • the first network device is the upper-level node of the first node
  • the second network device is the lower-level node of the first node node.
  • the first resource can be the frequency domain H resource (hard), indicating that the DU cell must be available in the frequency domain; the second resource can be the frequency domain NA resource (not available), indicating that the DU cell is unavailable.
  • Resources the resources available to the mobile terminal MT at this time; the third resource may be the frequency domain S resource (soft), indicating whether the DU cell is available for the resource needs to be determined according to the indication information sent by the upper node.
  • whether the S resource is available after being further indicated may be determined as “available” or “unavailable”, or may be determined as “available” or “not indicated as available”.
  • the indication of availability may be configured for one or more of three TDD transmission direction configurations of uplink, downlink, and flexible.
  • the uplink resource of S is indicated by signaling to indicate that it is available, and the downlink and flexible resources do not indicate that it is available, and so on.
  • the first node when the at least one resource is the first resource, the first node can communicate with the terminal device and/or the lower-level relay node; when the at least one resource is the second resource, the first node cannot.
  • the first node can communicate with the first network device; when the at least one resource is a third resource, the first node needs to determine whether the third resource can be used to communicate with the terminal device according to the indication of the first network device and/or subordinate relay nodes.
  • communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern includes: determining, according to the first pattern, resources for the first node to communicate with the second network device and/or the terminal device,
  • the first node is a relay node.
  • the IAB can report to the donor base station: when the frequency division (or frequency division pattern) is configured, the constraints for determining the size of the guard band include: the relationship between the guard band and the DU or MT bandwidth; The relationship between the guard band and the transmission timing mode; the relationship between the guard band and the synchronization state, etc.
  • reporting of the IAB to the donor base station may occur before the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB, or it may occur after the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB.
  • the donor base station first configures a set of configurations, and after receiving it, the IAB finds that it does not meet the guard band requirements or its hardware capabilities, so it triggers the IAB to report these constraints. condition.
  • case1 timing mode requires the IAB node DU to send the same time as other nodes including the Donor node, which meets the inter-station synchronization requirements of the TDD system; the case 6 timing mode is used for space division transmission; the case 7 timing mode is used for space division reception, and it is also possible Used for upstream full duplex.
  • timing type 2 and timing type 3 specify the rules for determining uplink transmission timing of the MT of the IAB node.
  • the uplink transmission timing of the MT is related to the downlink transmission timing of the DU.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU may be determined according to any method.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be aligned with the downlink transmission timing of the IAB donor node.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be instructed and adjusted by the upper node based on OTA synchronization signaling, or the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be obtained based on the global positioning system GPS, or based on the global navigation satellite system GNSS or BeiDou, etc. Obtain from other systems that support timing.
  • timing modes implicitly represent transmission modes, and the required guard band sizes may be different.
  • full duplex generally requires more guard bands than space division multiplexing.
  • frequency division multiplexing is used in order to increase the isolation between MT and DU during space division transmission or space division reception.
  • frequency division multiplexing can be performed when the above-mentioned timing mode case and timing mode case are adopted.
  • the configuration constraints of the frequency division may be reported to the donor base station by the protocol definition or the IAB.
  • RB of the lowest frequency point of DU cell RB of the highest frequency point of DU cell
  • DU cell frequency division including at least the initial part of the bandwidth
  • DU cell frequency division there can be no discontinuous frequency domain resources
  • DU cell frequency After dividing, it is divided into X segments of continuous frequency domain resources at most, starting from the lowest frequency point of the DU cell, consecutive X RBs, down from the highest frequency point of the DU cell, consecutive X RBs, and so on.
  • the processing unit is further configured to, in the first time domain resource, determine the resource for communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern ;
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to communicate with the second network device and/or the terminal device in the first time domain resource, the first node.
  • the first time domain resource here may be understood as a set of time resources, the first time domain resource may include one or more time slots, and the multiple time slots may be continuous time slots or discontinuous time slots .
  • the one or more time slots are mapped with a first pattern for communication between the first node and the second network device and/or the terminal device.
  • different frequency-domain resource patterns may be mapped on one or more time slots of the first time-domain resource.
  • the first time domain resource may also include one or more symbols, and the present application does not limit the time granularity.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second information, where the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource.
  • the multiple patterns are configured by a donor network device, that is, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive one or more patterns sent by the donor network device. configuration information.
  • the configuration information of the one or more patterns may be configured by the host network device one or more times, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the transceiver unit before the host network device configures the multiple patterns, the transceiver unit is further configured to send frequency division multiplexing configuration information to the host network device, the frequency division multiplexing Constraints for the arrangement of the plurality of patterns are included in the arrangement information.
  • the multiple patterns may also be predefined by a protocol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the configuration of each pattern includes a frequency domain resource bandwidth of at least one resource, and each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and any two pattern identification information different.
  • the configuration of each pattern further includes a frequency domain resource attribute of at least one resource, and each frequency domain resource attribute is the first resource, the second A resource, one of the third resource.
  • protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources may indicate that the attributes of the multi-segment frequency-domain resources are H/S/NA, and/or the protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources of various lengths.
  • each set includes continuous frequency domain resources
  • the corresponding frequency domain resources can be selected. Domain resources are mapped into a three-segment pattern.
  • the protocol when the protocol only defines a frequency domain resource pattern of one length, such as a pattern with five segments in the frequency domain, then only the resources of the first three resource attributes in each pattern need to be mapped, that is, the The first three resource attributes correspond to the availability of each segment of the resource.
  • the configuration of the frequency domain resource bandwidth includes a starting resource block number of the at least one resource and a number of resource blocks of the at least one resource.
  • the frequency domain resource bandwidth is configured by the host network device, or the frequency domain resource bandwidth is predefined by a protocol.
  • the DU calculates the actually indicated bandwidth based on the bandwidth actually used by the cell. This application does not limit this.
  • each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and through the identification of the pattern, the frequency domain size of each resource in the corresponding frequency domain resource pattern and the frequency domain attribute corresponding to each resource can be determined.
  • the SLIV is configured based on the start and length indications of the frequency domain resources, the start and duration lengths of the frequency domain bandwidth resources are predefined by the protocol, and the indexes of the start and end frequency domain resources of the scheduled frequency domain resources are mapped. That is, the network device can determine the starting resource block number and the number of resource blocks of the corresponding frequency domain resource through the index value, thereby configuring the frequency domain length of the frequency domain H//S/NA.
  • the first information includes identification information of at least one pattern set, and the identification information of the at least one pattern set is used to determine at least one target pattern set, the at least one target pattern set.
  • the pattern set includes the first pattern, wherein the configuration of each pattern set includes at least one pattern in the plurality of patterns, and each pattern set has corresponding pattern set identification information, and the identification information of any two pattern sets is different.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive third information, where the third information is used to configure at least one first time slot; the processing unit is further configured to At least one first pattern is mapped on the at least one first time slot.
  • the first time slot is a time slot within a first time domain period, or the first time slot is a time domain resource within the first time domain period Time slots corresponding to four resources, wherein the first time domain period corresponds to the period configured by the first time domain resource, and whether the fourth resource is available is determined by second indication information, and the second indication information is the first time domain period. sent by the network device.
  • the first time slot may also be all time slots in the first time domain period.
  • the first time slot here may be a non-TDM time slot, or directly referred to as an FDM time slot.
  • This application does not limit the specific name of the first time slot. Part of the time slot configuration frequency division resource configuration.
  • the present application does not limit the number of first time slots supporting this function.
  • first time slot is only an implementation manner of the time granularity, and the first symbol and the like can also be determined in the first time period, and the specific time granularity is not limited in this application.
  • the first period may correspond to the period of the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration of the first period, or a period may be configured separately, and the unit is the number of time slots, or absolute time, or a system may be used.
  • a frame is one period, and the present application does not limit the manner of determining the first period.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine the first time period and/or the total number of time slots in the first period according to the subcarrier spacing; the processing unit, It is also used for determining the number of time slots corresponding to the first time slot according to the number of the first time slot and/or the number set of the first time slot.
  • the DU calculates the number of time slots in the first cycle according to the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration cycle and the configured subcarrier spacing, and determines which time slots are based on the number of the first time slot. is a non-TDM time slot.
  • the total number of time slots in the period is determined by taking the subcarrier spacing of the initial partial bandwidth BWP of the cell of the DU as a reference. Because under a given subcarrier interval, the total number of time slots in the system frame is fixed.
  • the referenced subcarrier spacing may be configured independently, or refer to the configuration of existing subcarrier spacing in other signaling or other application scenarios with reference to other current protocols, which is not limited in this application.
  • the number of the at least one pattern is the same as the number of the first time slot, or the number of the at least one pattern is a positive integer of the number of the first time slot times, or the number of the at least one pattern is less than the number of the first time slot.
  • the radio frequency domain resource H/S/NA when the radio frequency domain resource H/S/NA is mapped in the first time slot, different frequency domain resource patterns may be mapped to the first time slot.
  • the frequency domain H resource is mapped to the first time slot, or on the basis of the resource configuration, the frequency domain resource NA is mapped to the first time slot, at this time, the frequency domain NA resource covers the frequency domain.
  • the domain H resource that is, the availability of the frequency domain resource of the DU of the first node on the first time slot changes from a certain available resource to an unavailable resource. That is, H/S/NA resources can be arbitrarily combined in the mapping of radio frequency domain resources from time domain resources, which is not limited in this application, and is specifically subject to the communication requirements between the network device and the first node and/or terminal device.
  • any resource of the frequency domain resources H/S/NA can be mapped in the first time slot; or S+NA, that is, after the frequency domain S resource is first mapped in the first time slot, and then according to further indication information in this resource.
  • the S resource shows the radio frequency domain resource NA; or S+H, H+NA, S+H+NA, etc.
  • the application does not limit the mapping method of the resource.
  • the same frequency domain resource eg, frequency domain H resource
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive fourth information, where the fourth information is used to indicate resource availability of the third resource.
  • the fourth information is further used to indicate the resource availability of the fourth resource, that is, the resource whose domain resource attribute is S.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive fifth information, where the fifth information is used to indicate the grouping information of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time slot;
  • the unit is further configured to receive sixth information, where the sixth message is used to indicate resource attributes of at least one frequency domain resource group.
  • the granularity and manner of frequency domain resource division may be RBG, the number of RBs, or partial bandwidth BWP, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the processing unit is further configured to acquire a first relationship and/or a second relationship, where the first relationship is the indication information of the availability of the first parameter and the first resource The first relationship is used to indicate the resource availability of the first time slot, the second relationship is the corresponding relationship between the second parameter and the indication information of the second resource availability, and the second relationship is used to indicate Resource availability of the frequency domain resource of the first time slot; the processing unit is further configured to determine the first pattern according to the first relationship and/or the second relationship.
  • first relationship and the second relationship may indicate the availability of all time-domain resources and the availability of all frequency-domain resources, and/or may indicate the first time slot, that is, the resources of the time slot requiring frequency division multiplexing availability, and/or may indicate the availability of frequency domain resources of the first time slot, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive seventh information, where the seventh information includes at least one identification information indicating a set, and the at least one identification information indicating a set is for determining at least one target indication set, the at least one target indication set includes a first parameter and/or a second parameter, wherein the identification information of any two indication sets is different; the processing unit is also used for determining according to the at least one target indication set The set determines resource attributes of one or more frequency domain resources of at least one first time slot.
  • the bearing methods such as the indication information and configuration information involved may be, but are not limited to: one or at least two of radio resource control signaling, medium access control MAC layer signaling, and physical layer PHY signaling The combination.
  • the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control RRC signaling;
  • the MAC layer signaling includes: MAC control element CE;
  • the physical layer signaling includes: downlink control information DCI and the like.
  • a wireless communication device comprising: a transceiver unit configured to send first information, where the first information includes indication information of a first pattern, the first pattern is one of a plurality of patterns, the plurality of patterns Each of the patterns is used to indicate the distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain, and the at least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource, the first resource The resource is a certain available resource, the second resource is an unavailable resource, and whether the third resource is available is determined by the first indication information, the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein any two patterns are The indicated resource distributions are different; the processing unit is used to determine the resources for communicating with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern, where the first node is a relay node; the transceiver unit is also used for the network device to communicate with the terminal device. The first node and/or the terminal device communicate.
  • the third resource when the first network device does not send the first indication information, the third resource is not available for the default DU cell.
  • the present application is applicable to a wireless communication system including a relay node, wherein the relay node may be an IAB node, or may also be a terminal device, that is, a terminal device with a wireless relay function.
  • the relay node may be an IAB node, or may also be a terminal device, that is, a terminal device with a wireless relay function.
  • whether the first resource, the second resource, and the third resource are available may be configured for the cell of the distributed unit DU of the first node, or may be configured for the partial bandwidth (bandwidth part) of the distributed unit of the first node. , BWP), or configured for part of the frequency domain resources of the distributed unit DU of the first node, such as RBG, the first network device is the upper node of the first node, and the second network device is Subordinate nodes of the first node.
  • the first resource can be the frequency domain H resource (hard), indicating that the DU cell must be available in the frequency domain; the second resource can be the frequency domain NA resource (not available), indicating that the DU cell is unavailable.
  • Resources the resources available to the mobile terminal MT at this time; the third resource may be the frequency domain S resource (soft), indicating whether the DU cell is available for the resource needs to be determined according to the indication information sent by the upper node.
  • whether the S resource is available after being further indicated may be determined as “available” or “unavailable”, or may be determined as “available” or “not indicated as available”.
  • the indication of availability may be configured for one or more of three TDD transmission direction configurations of uplink, downlink, and flexible.
  • the uplink resource of S is indicated by signaling to indicate that it is available, and the downlink and flexible resources do not indicate that it is available, and so on.
  • the first node when the at least one resource is the first resource, the first node can communicate with the terminal device and/or the lower-level relay node; when the at least one resource is the second resource, the first node cannot.
  • the first node can communicate with the first network device; when the at least one resource is a third resource, the first node needs to determine whether the third resource can be used to communicate with the terminal device according to the indication of the first network device and/or subordinate relay nodes.
  • the communication with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern includes: determining the resources for the network device to communicate with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern, the first Nodes are relay nodes.
  • the resource types included in each pattern at least include at least one of certain availability, unavailability, and availability depending on the further indication of the upper-level node.
  • the first information indicates a first pattern among the plurality of patterns, and communication between the network device and the first node and/or the terminal device is implemented based on the first pattern.
  • the IAB can report to the donor base station: when the frequency division (or frequency division pattern) is configured, the constraints for determining the size of the guard band include: the relationship between the guard band and the DU or MT bandwidth; The relationship between the guard band and the transmission timing mode; the relationship between the guard band and the synchronization state, etc.
  • reporting of the IAB to the donor base station may occur before the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB, or it may occur after the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB.
  • the donor base station first configures a set of configurations, and after receiving it, the IAB finds that it does not meet the guard band requirements or its hardware capabilities, so it triggers the IAB to report these constraints. condition.
  • case1 timing mode requires the IAB node DU to send the same time as other nodes including the Donor node, which meets the inter-station synchronization requirements of the TDD system; the case 6 timing mode is used for space division transmission; the case 7 timing mode is used for space division reception, and it is also possible Used for upstream full duplex.
  • timing type 2 and timing type 3 specify the rules for determining uplink transmission timing of the MT of the IAB node.
  • the uplink transmission timing of the MT is related to the downlink transmission timing of the DU.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU may be determined according to any method.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be aligned with the downlink transmission timing of the IAB donor node.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be instructed and adjusted by the upper node based on OTA synchronization signaling, or the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be obtained based on the global positioning system GPS, or based on the global navigation satellite system GNSS or BeiDou, etc. Obtain from other systems that support timing.
  • timing modes implicitly represent transmission modes, and the required guard band sizes may be different.
  • full duplex generally requires more guard bands than space division multiplexing.
  • frequency division multiplexing is used in order to increase the isolation between MT and DU during space division transmission or space division reception.
  • frequency division multiplexing can be performed when the above-mentioned timing mode case and timing mode case are adopted.
  • the configuration constraints of the frequency division may be reported to the donor base station by the protocol definition or the IAB.
  • RB of the lowest frequency point of DU cell RB of the highest frequency point of DU cell
  • DU cell frequency division including at least the initial part of the bandwidth
  • DU cell frequency division there can be no discontinuous frequency domain resources
  • DU cell frequency After dividing, it is divided into X segments of continuous frequency domain resources at most, starting from the lowest frequency point of the DU cell, consecutive X RBs, down from the highest frequency point of the DU cell, consecutive X RBs, and so on.
  • the processing unit is further configured to, in the first time domain resource, determine the resource for communicating with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern;
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to communicate with the first node and/or the terminal device in the first time domain resource, the network device.
  • the first time domain resource here may be understood as a set of time resources, the first time domain resource may include one or more time slots, and the multiple time slots may be continuous time slots or discontinuous time slots .
  • the one or more time slots are mapped with a first pattern for communication between the first node and the second network device and/or the terminal device.
  • different frequency-domain resource patterns may be mapped on one or more time slots of the first time-domain resource.
  • the first time domain resource may also include one or more symbols, and the present application does not limit the time granularity.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send second information, where the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource.
  • the multiple patterns are configured by a donor network device, that is, the transceiver unit is also used for the donor network device to send configuration information of one or more patterns .
  • the configuration information of the one or more patterns may be configured by the host network device one or more times, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the transceiver unit before the host network device configures the multiple patterns, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive the frequency division multiplexing configuration information from the first node by the host network device,
  • the frequency division multiplexing configuration information includes constraints of the plurality of pattern configurations.
  • the multiple patterns may also be predefined by a protocol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the configuration of each pattern includes the frequency domain resource bandwidth of the at least one resource, wherein each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and any two patterns identify Information is different.
  • each pattern further includes a frequency domain resource attribute of at least one resource, and each frequency domain resource attribute is the first resource, the second A resource, one of the third resource.
  • protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources may indicate that the attributes of the multi-segment frequency-domain resources are H/S/NA, and/or the protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources of various lengths.
  • each set includes continuous frequency domain resources
  • the corresponding frequency domain resources can be selected. Domain resources are mapped into a three-segment pattern.
  • the protocol when the protocol only defines a frequency domain resource pattern of one length, such as a pattern with five segments in the frequency domain, then only the resources of the first three resource attributes in each pattern need to be mapped, that is, the The first three resource attributes correspond to the availability of each segment of the resource.
  • the configuration of the frequency domain resource bandwidth includes a starting resource block number of the at least one resource and a number of resource blocks of the at least one resource.
  • the frequency domain resource bandwidth is configured by the host network device, or the frequency domain resource bandwidth is predefined by a protocol.
  • the DU calculates the actually indicated bandwidth based on the bandwidth actually used by the cell. This application does not limit this.
  • each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and the frequency domain size of each resource in the corresponding frequency domain resource pattern and the corresponding frequency domain attribute of each resource can be determined through the pattern identification.
  • the SLIV is configured based on the start and length indications of the frequency domain resources, the start and duration lengths of the frequency domain bandwidth resources are predefined by the protocol, and the indexes of the start and end frequency domain resources of the scheduled frequency domain resources are mapped. That is, the network device can determine the starting resource block number and the number of resource blocks of the corresponding frequency domain resource through the index value, thereby configuring the frequency domain length of the frequency domain H//S/NA.
  • the first information includes identification information of at least one pattern set, and the identification information of the at least one pattern set is used to determine at least one target pattern set, the at least one target pattern set.
  • the pattern set includes the first pattern, wherein the configuration of each pattern set includes at least one pattern in the plurality of patterns, and each pattern set has corresponding pattern set identification information, and the identification information of any two pattern sets is different.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send third information, where the third information is used to configure at least one first time slot; the processing unit is further configured to At least one first pattern is mapped on the at least one first time slot.
  • the first time slot is a time slot within a first time domain period, or the first time slot is a time domain resource within the first time domain period Time slots corresponding to four resources, wherein the first time domain period corresponds to the period configured by the first time domain resource, and whether the fourth resource is available is determined by second indication information, and the second indication information is the first time domain period. sent by the network device.
  • the first time slot may also be all time slots in the first time domain period.
  • the first time slot here may be a non-TDM time slot, or directly referred to as an FDM time slot.
  • This application does not limit the specific name of the first time slot.
  • the first time slot only supports one function, that is, it is allowed to be Part of the time slot configuration frequency division resource configuration.
  • the present application does not limit the number of first time slots supporting this function.
  • first time slot is only an implementation manner of the time granularity, and the first symbol and the like may also be determined in the first time period, and the present application does not limit the specific time granularity.
  • the first period may correspond to the period of the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration of the first period, or a period may be configured separately, and the unit is the number of time slots, or absolute time, or a system may be used.
  • a frame is one period, and the present application does not limit the manner of determining the first period.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine the first time period and/or the total number of time slots in the first period according to the subcarrier spacing; the processing unit, It is also used for determining the number of time slots corresponding to the first time slot according to the number of the first time slot and/or the number set of the first time slot.
  • the DU calculates the number of time slots in the first cycle according to the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration cycle and the configured subcarrier spacing, and determines which time slots are based on the number of the first time slot. is a non-TDM time slot.
  • the total number of time slots in the period is determined by taking the subcarrier spacing of the initial partial bandwidth BWP of the cell of the DU as a reference. Because under a given subcarrier interval, the total number of time slots in the system frame is fixed.
  • the referenced subcarrier spacing may be configured independently, or refer to the configuration of existing subcarrier spacing in other signaling or other application scenarios with reference to other current protocols, which is not limited in this application.
  • the number of the at least one pattern is the same as the number of the first time slot, or the number of the at least one pattern is a positive integer of the number of the first time slot times, or the number of the at least one pattern is less than the number of the first time slot.
  • the radio frequency domain resource H/S/NA when the radio frequency domain resource H/S/NA is mapped in the first time slot, different frequency domain resource patterns may be mapped to the first time slot.
  • the frequency domain H resource is mapped to the first time slot, or on the basis of the resource configuration, the frequency domain resource NA is mapped to the first time slot, at this time, the frequency domain NA resource covers the frequency domain.
  • the domain H resource that is, the availability of the frequency domain resource of the DU of the first node on the first time slot changes from a certain available resource to an unavailable resource. That is, H/S/NA resources can be arbitrarily combined in the mapping of radio frequency domain resources from time domain resources, which is not limited in this application, and is specifically subject to the communication requirements between the network device and the first node and/or terminal device.
  • any one of the frequency domain resources H/S/NA can be mapped in the first time slot; or S+NA, that is, after the frequency domain S resource is first mapped in the first time slot, then according to further indication information
  • the S resource shows the radio frequency domain resource NA; or S+H, H+NA, S+H+NA, etc.
  • the application does not limit the mapping method of the resource.
  • the same frequency domain resource eg, frequency domain H resource
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send fourth information, where the fourth information is used to indicate resource availability of the third resource.
  • the fourth information is further used to indicate the resource availability of the fourth resource, that is, the resource whose domain resource attribute is S.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send fifth information, where the fifth information is used to indicate the grouping information of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time slot; Sixth information, where the sixth message is used to indicate resource attributes of at least one frequency domain resource group.
  • the granularity and manner of frequency domain resource division may be RBG, the number of RBs, or partial bandwidth BWP, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the processing unit is further configured to acquire a first relationship and/or a second relationship, where the first relationship is the indication information of the availability of the first parameter and the first resource The first relationship is used to indicate the resource availability of the first time slot, the second relationship is the corresponding relationship between the second parameter and the indication information of the second resource availability, and the second relationship is used to indicate Resource availability of the frequency domain resource of the first time slot; the processing unit is further configured to determine the first pattern according to the first relationship and/or the second relationship.
  • first relationship and the second relationship may indicate the availability of all time-domain resources and the availability of all frequency-domain resources, and/or may indicate the first time slot, that is, the resources of the time slot requiring frequency division multiplexing availability, and/or may indicate the availability of frequency domain resources of the first time slot, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send seventh information, where the seventh information includes at least one identification information indicating a set, and the at least one identification information indicating a set is used for determining at least one target indication set, the at least one target indication set includes a first parameter and/or a second parameter, wherein the identification information of any two indication sets is different; the processing unit is also used for determining according to the at least one target indication set The set determines resource attributes of one or more frequency domain resources of at least one first time slot.
  • the bearing methods such as the indication information and configuration information involved may be, but are not limited to: one or at least two of radio resource control signaling, medium access control MAC layer signaling, and physical layer PHY signaling The combination.
  • the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control RRC signaling;
  • the MAC layer signaling includes: MAC control element CE;
  • the physical layer signaling includes: downlink control information DCI and the like.
  • a first node and/or terminal device including a processor, and optionally, a memory, where the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals, the memory is used for storing a computer program, the processing The computer program is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the first node and/or the terminal device executes the method in the first aspect or any of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the processor is one or more, and the memory is one or more.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
  • the first node and/or the terminal device further includes a transceiver, and the transceiver may specifically be a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • the transceiver may specifically be a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a network device including a processor, and optionally, a memory, where the processor is used to control a transceiver to send and receive signals, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling from the memory And run the computer program, so that the network device executes the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the processor is one or more, and the memory is one or more.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be provided separately from the processor.
  • the network device further includes a transceiver, and the transceiver may specifically be a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • a communication device comprising: various modules or units for implementing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or for implementing the second aspect or any of the second aspect.
  • a communication system including: a first node and/or a terminal device for executing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect; and a network device for executing The above second aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program or code, and when the computer program or code runs on a computer, the computer is made to execute the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect A method in any possible implementation manner, the second aspect or a method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • a tenth aspect provides a chip comprising at least one processor coupled to a memory for storing a computer program, the processor for invoking and running the computer program from the memory, such that a computer program is installed with
  • the first node and/or terminal device of the chip system executes the first aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, and causes the network device installed with the chip system to execute the second aspect or any of the second aspect.
  • the chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
  • a computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code is run by a network device, the first node and/or the terminal device executes the above-mentioned first aspect or The method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, and causing the network device to execute the second aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a wireless communication method, comprising: receiving configuration information, where the configuration information is used to indicate availability of resources, the configuration information includes identification information of a plurality of indication sets, each indication set includes a plurality of time domain resources and /or Indication of the availability of frequency domain resources; the availability of frequency domain resources and/or time domain resources is determined according to the configuration information.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a wireless communication method, comprising: sending configuration information, where the configuration information is used to indicate availability of resources, the configuration information includes identification information of multiple indication sets, each indication set includes multiple time domain resources and /or Indication of the availability of frequency domain resources; the availability of frequency domain resources and/or time domain resources is determined according to the configuration information.
  • the method further includes: receiving the first information.
  • the first information may be the first information described in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the indication of frequency domain resource availability includes a resource availability indication of at least one RB set group, and each RB set group includes at least one time slot RB set group resource availability indication.
  • the indication of frequency domain resource availability includes a resource availability indication of at least one time slot, the at least one time slot includes a first time slot, and the first time slot further includes Availability indication of at least one RB set group resource.
  • the multiple indication sets include a first indication set and a second indication set, the first indication set corresponds to time domain resources, and the second indication set corresponds to frequency domain resources
  • the indication of resource availability corresponds to that the identification information of the first indication set is different from the identification information of the second indication set.
  • a wireless communication method and apparatus are provided, which are mapped to time-domain resources that need to be frequency-division multiplexed by pre-defining and configuring the pattern of frequency-division resources, and further indicating through signaling
  • the availability of some or all of the resources on each frequency division time slot can realize the resource configuration of the relay node.
  • the network for example, the donor base station and the IAB node
  • the network can at least divide the available bandwidth of the DU cell in two ways: frequency division and non-frequency division.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an example of a network architecture to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another example of the network architecture applicable to the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an example of a node structure of an integrated access and backhaul IAB to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a space division multiplexing scenario to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of a frequency division multiplexing scenario to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another example of a frequency division multiplexing scenario applicable to the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an example of resource utilization under the DU time domain resource configuration supported by the current protocol.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another example of resource utilization under the DU time domain resource configuration supported by the current protocol.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another example of resource utilization under the DU time domain resource configuration supported by the current protocol.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an example of a wireless communication method to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another example of the wireless communication method to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an example of a frequency-domain H/S/NA pattern configuration to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the H/S/NA pattern configuration to which the cell frequency domain segmentation of the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an example of mapping a frequency-domain H/S/NA pattern to a periodic non-TDM time slot to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of another example of the method of applying the resource allocation of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an example of configuring a part of time domain resources to which the present application is applied as non-TDM time slots.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of an example of frequency domain segmentation of non-TDM time slots to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an example of indicating whether a frequency domain resource is available through signaling to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an example of frequency domain resource availability to which the time domain resource S of the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of an example of a wireless communication apparatus to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of another example of a wireless communication apparatus to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an example of a network device to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of an example of a terminal device to which the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of another example of the wireless communication method to which the present application is applied.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • CDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • General Packet Radio Service General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WIMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • 5G 5th Generation
  • NR New Radio
  • mobile communication systems will not only support traditional communication, but will also support, for example, device to device (D2D) communication, machine to machine (M2M) communication, machine type Machine type communication (MTC), vehicle to everything (V2X) communication, for example, vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle to infrastructure (V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian (vehicle to pedestrian, V2P) communication, vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc., Long Term Evolution-Vehicle (LTE-V), vehicle networking, machine type communication (machine type communication, MTC), Internet of Things (Internet of Things, IoT), Long Term Evolution-Machine (LTE-M), Machine to Machine (M2M), etc.
  • D2D device to device
  • M2M machine to machine
  • MTC machine type Machine type communication
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • V2X vehicle to vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication
  • V2V vehicle to infrastructure
  • V2I vehicle to pedestrian (vehi
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may be referred to as user equipment (user equipment, UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, Wireless communication devices, user agents or user equipment, soft terminals, etc., including various handheld devices, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems with wireless communication capabilities.
  • user equipment user equipment
  • the terminal can be a mobile station (Mobile Station, MS), a subscriber unit (subscriber unit), a cellular phone (cellular phone), a smart phone (smart phone), a wireless data card, a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA) computer, tablet computer, wireless modem (modem), handheld device (handset), laptop computer (laptop computer), machine type communication (Machine Type Communication, MTC) terminal, etc.
  • MS Mobile Station
  • subscriber unit subscriber unit
  • a cellular phone cellular phone
  • smart phone smart phone
  • wireless data card a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA) computer, tablet computer, wireless modem (modem), handheld device (handset), laptop computer (laptop computer), machine type communication (Machine Type Communication, MTC) terminal, etc.
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • modem modem
  • handset handheld device
  • laptop computer laptop computer
  • machine type communication Machine Type Communication
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may also be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal device, an industrial control (industrial control) wireless terminal in control), wireless terminal in self-driving, wireless terminal in remote medical, wireless terminal in smart grid, wireless terminal in transportation safety Terminal, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, cellular phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, wireless local loop , WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld terminal, notebook computer, cordless phone (cordless phone) or wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station, terminal equipment in the future 5G network, Or the terminal equipment in the public land mobile communication network PLMN that evolves in the future.
  • a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal device
  • industrial control industrial control
  • wireless terminal in self-driving wireless terminal
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an internet of things (Internet of things, IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of things
  • IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect items to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things. It should be understood that the present application does not limit the specific form of the terminal device.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide a wireless communication function for terminal devices.
  • the equipment includes but is not limited to: a radio network controller (Radio Network Controller, RNC), a base station controller (Base Station Controller, BSC), a home base station (for example, Home evolved NodeB, or Home Node B, HNB), baseband unit ( BaseBand Unit, BBU), access point (Access Point, AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (transmission and reception point) in the wireless fidelity system, TRP), etc., it can also be a gNB or a transmission point (TRP or TP) in a 5G (such as NR) system, or one or a group (including multiple antenna panels) antenna panels of a base station in a 5G system, or it can also be A network node that constitutes a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit BBU, or a distributed
  • the network devices in the embodiments of the present application may include various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations (also referred to as small cells), relay stations, access points, etc., and may be base stations in the GSM system for global mobile communications or code division multiple access (CDMA) (Base Transceiver Station, BTS), it can also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in the wideband code division multiple access WCDMA system, it can also be an evolved base station (Evolutional NodeB, eNB or eNodeB) in the LTE system, and it can also be a cloud A wireless controller in a wireless access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN) scenario, or the network device can be a relay station, an access point, a wearable device or a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and a network device in the future 5G network or Network equipment and the like in the public land mobile network (PLMN) network that evolves in the future.
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU-CP node) and user plane CU node (CU-UP node) and RAN equipment of DU node.
  • the network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources) allocated by the network equipment.
  • the cell may belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell.
  • Small cells can include: urban cells (metro cells), micro cells (micro cells), pico cells (pico cells), femto cells (femto cells), etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for to provide high-speed data transmission services.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an example of a network architecture applicable to the present application.
  • the network architecture includes a network device (eg, a donor base station), a relay device (eg, an IAB node 1 and an IAB node 2 ) and a terminal device ( For example, UE1 and UE2) three types of devices.
  • the relay equipment is outside the planned coverage of the network equipment.
  • the distance from the relay device to the network device is greater than the distance from the terminal device to the network device.
  • a link between a network device and a relay device may be referred to as a backhaul (BH) link, and a link between a relay device and a terminal device may be referred to as an access (access, AC) link.
  • BH backhaul
  • AC access
  • a network device may also be referred to as a "donor network device” or “donor network device” or “donor base station” or “relay device”.
  • the donor base station may be an access network element with a complete base station function, or may be an access network element in the form of the centralized unit CU and the distributed unit DU being separated.
  • the network device may be an IAB node, or a node for relaying communication.
  • the relay device may be deployed at a place farther from the base station or the access device than the terminal device, and the access device may be another relay device.
  • the name of the relay device can be relaying node (RN), relaying transmission and reception point (rTRP), or integrated access and backhaul node (IAB) node), the upper node of the relay node may be a gNB (including gNB-DU, gNB-CU, etc.), or another relay node.
  • the present application is applicable to a wireless communication system with relay nodes.
  • the IAB relay system can support multi-level relay, that is, the IAB node can establish a wireless backhaul link with one or more upper-level nodes, and Access the donor base station through the one or more upper-level nodes.
  • an IAB node can also provide services for one or more subordinate nodes.
  • the donor base station can communicate with the IAB node 1 or directly with the user equipment UE1; similarly, the IAB node 1 can communicate with the IAB node 2, and can also communicate with the user equipment UE2.
  • Fig. 2 is another example schematic diagram of the network architecture applicable to the present application.
  • the donor base station can be further divided into CU and DU in terms of function and logic, and the interior of the IAB node can be further divided into mobile terminals ( mobile-termination, MT) module and distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) module.
  • mobile-termination, MT mobile-termination
  • DU distributed unit
  • the MT function is defined as a UE-like component.
  • IAB IAB
  • MT is referred to as a function that resides on an IAB node. Since the MT is similar to the function of a common UE, it can be understood that the IAB node accesses the upper node or the network through the MT.
  • the DU function is relative to the CU function.
  • the base station function is divided into two parts called CU-DU separation.
  • the CU includes the radio resource control (RRC) layer and the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer of the original LTE base station
  • the DU includes the radio link control (radio link control) layer.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU includes the radio link control (radio link control) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • media access control media access control
  • MAC physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • CU and DU can be physically connected by optical fiber, and there is a specially defined F1 interface logically for communication between CU and DU.
  • CU is mainly responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, such as radio resource control and configuration, cross-cell mobility management, bearer management, etc.
  • DU is mainly responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, such as scheduling, physical signal generation and send.
  • the functions of these protocol layers may be implemented by one node, or may be implemented by multiple nodes; for example, in an evolution structure, the RAN device may include a centralized unit CU and a distributed unit DU, and multiple DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
  • downlink transmission is performed between the CU and the DU, and the F1-AP data packet generated by the CU is encapsulated into an IP packet and transmitted between air interface multi-hop nodes (for example, IAB node 1 and IAB node 2).
  • air interface multi-hop nodes for example, IAB node 1 and IAB node 2.
  • the data packet arrives at the target IAB node, after being processed by the MT module adaptation layer of the target IAB, the data packet is transferred to the DU module of the local IAB for processing, and finally parsed into the F1-AP data packet in the DU.
  • the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device can be sent to the CU through the DU.
  • the DU may directly encapsulate the signaling at the protocol layer and transparently transmit it to the terminal device or CU without parsing the signaling.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of an example of the structure of the integrated access and backhaul IAB node applicable to the present application.
  • the IAB node can be divided into an MT module and a DU module. It is the MT side or MT function module of the mobile terminal, that is, the IAB node communicates with the upper node through the MT; the IAB node as the access network equipment similar to the base station is called the distributed unit DU side or the DU function module, that is, the IAB node communicates with the upper-level node through the DU. Subordinate nodes communicate with the UE. Both the MT and DU of the IAB node have complete transceiver modules, and there is an interface between them.
  • the MT and the DU are logical modules, and in practice, the two may share some sub-modules, such as sharing a transceiver antenna, a baseband processing module, and the like.
  • the resource configuration of the IAB node may include MT resource configuration and DU resource configuration.
  • the MT resource configuration is used to indicate the resource configuration when the MT of the IAB node communicates with the upper-level node, and the MT resource of the IAB node can be configured as uplink (uplink, UL), downlink (downlink, DL), flexible (flexible, F) ) three types.
  • the DU resource configuration is used to indicate the resource configuration when the DU of the IAB node communicates with the subordinate node.
  • the DU resource of the IAB node can be configured as uplink (uplink, UL), downlink (downlink, DL), flexible (flexible, F) three. types.
  • the DU resource configuration of the IAB node is indicated by the upper-level node or the donor base station through interface signaling.
  • the communication system may further include core network equipment, the core network equipment may be connected with a plurality of access network equipment for controlling the access network equipment, and may distribute data received from the network side (eg, the Internet) to access network equipment.
  • the network side eg, the Internet
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed to execute the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application. It is enough to communicate.
  • the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call a program and execute the program; or can be used in a terminal device. or components of network equipment (eg chips or circuits).
  • various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer readable device, carrier or medium.
  • computer readable media may include, but are not limited to, magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), card, stick or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • Guard band refers to the part of bandwidth resources reserved by MT and DU in the use of frequency domain resources. That is, the MT and the DU neither transmit nor receive signals on the bandwidth resource, so that the related interference between the MT and the DU can be avoided.
  • Timing mode refers to different transmission timing schemes defined in the protocol for different transmission modes, including the following three different timing types.
  • the timing type 1 in the standard is used: case #1 timing, that is, the transmission time of the DU.
  • the MT of the IAB node determines the uplink transmission timing according to the timing advance (timing advance, TA) indication information of the upper-level node.
  • TA timing advance
  • Downlink transmission timing of DUs of the IAB node is aligned between DUs of different nodes. That is to say, the case #1 timing mode requires the IAB node DU to send the same time as other nodes including the host node donor, which meets the inter-station synchronization requirements of the TDD system.
  • timing type 2 case #6 timing mode is used for space division transmission. It should be understood that the uplink transmission timing of the MT of the IAB node needs to be aligned with the downlink transmission timing of the DU of the IAB node.
  • timing type 3 case #7 timing mode is used for space division reception, and possibly for uplink full duplex. It should be understood that the uplink reception timing of the MT of the IAB node needs to be aligned with the downlink reception timing of the DU of the IAB node.
  • space division multiplexing between the DU and the MT of the IAB node means that when the DU is sent downlink, the MT is sent uplink.
  • the MT performs downlink reception.
  • the MT performs uplink transmission, which can be briefly described as a space-division multiplexing scenario in which the IAB nodes simultaneously send; Space division multiplexing scenarios.
  • the above-mentioned timing type 1 can be applied to the time-division multiplexing of MT and DU of the IAB node; the above-mentioned timing type 2 can be applied to the space-division multiplexing scenario sent by the IAB node at the same time; the above-mentioned timing type 3 can be applied to the IAB node at the same time. Received space division multiplexing scenario.
  • the above three timing types define the rules for determining the uplink transmission timing of the MT of the IAB node.
  • the uplink transmission timing of the MT is related to the downlink transmission timing of the DU.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU may be determined according to any method.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be aligned with the downlink transmission timing of the IAB donor node.
  • the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be instructed and adjusted by the upper node based on over-the-air synchronization (OTA synchronization), or the downlink transmission timing of the DU can be based on the global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS). ), or obtained from other systems that support timing, such as the global navigation satellite system (GNSS) or Beidou.
  • OTA synchronization over-the-air synchronization
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • Beidou Beidou
  • timing modes implicitly represent transmission modes, and the required guard band sizes may also be different.
  • full duplex generally requires more guard bands than space division multiplexing.
  • Constrained timing mode of frequency division multiplexing Generally, frequency division multiplexing is used in order to increase the isolation between MT and DU during space division transmission or space division reception.
  • frequency division multiplexing can be performed when the above-mentioned timing mode case #6 timing and timing mode case #7 timing are adopted.
  • Upper-level node the node that receives data or signals during uplink transmission, or the node that sends data or signals during downlink transmission; the node and network equipment that provide wireless backhaul link resources are called the upper-level point of the relay device .
  • Subordinate nodes nodes that send data or signals during uplink transmission, or nodes that receive data or signals during downlink transmission; nodes that use backhaul link resources to transmit data to the network, or receive data from the network are called nodes. It is a subordinate node, for example, a relay device is called a subordinate node of a network device, and the network is a core network or a network above other access networks, such as the Internet, a private network, and the like.
  • Access link refers to a wireless link used by a node to communicate with its subordinate nodes, including links for uplink transmission and downlink transmission.
  • the uplink transmission on the access link is also referred to as the uplink transmission of the access link, and the downlink transmission is also referred to as the downlink transmission of the access link.
  • the nodes include but are not limited to the aforementioned IAB nodes.
  • the backhaul link refers to a wireless link used by a node to communicate with its upper-level node and/or lower-level node, including links for uplink transmission and downlink transmission.
  • the uplink transmission on the backhaul link is also referred to as the uplink transmission of the backhaul link, and the downlink transmission is also referred to as the downlink transmission of the backhaul link.
  • the nodes include but are not limited to the aforementioned IAB nodes.
  • Spatial duplex multiplexing can be understood as allowing the same frequency band to be reused in different spaces, and using orthogonal channels on multiple spaces to transmit signals at the same time to achieve the purpose of expansion . simply put. It is to receive signals from multiple directions at the same time. In order to improve the spectral efficiency, space division multiplexing scenarios are widely used.
  • Time division multiplexing can be understood as using different time periods of a unified physical connection to transmit different signals to achieve the purpose of multiplexing.
  • Time division multiplexing uses time as a parameter for signal division, so it is necessary to make each signal do not overlap each other on the time axis. In other words, the time provided for the transmission of information on the entire channel is divided into several time slots, and these time slots are allocated to each signal source for use.
  • Frequency division multiplexing can be understood as dividing the total bandwidth used for the transmission channel into several sub-bands (sub-channels), each sub-channel transmits a signal, and each sub-channel transmits a signal.
  • a guard band is set up between the sub-channels for isolation, so that the transmitted signals do not interfere with each other, and the signals transmitted by the sub-channels work in a parallel manner.
  • Time-division resources and frequency-division resources refer to a time slot or symbol of a DU cell, and all its frequency domain resources are configured with the same resource type (H/S/NA).
  • Frequency division resources refer to a time slot or symbol of a DU cell, and its frequency domain resources are further divided into multiple RB sets, or RB set groups. Wherein, for each RB set, or RB set group, the resource type (H/S/NA) can be configured or indicated respectively.
  • the resource availability indication can be configured by the donor base station to the IAB MT to dynamically indicate the availability of soft resources in the time domain.
  • the donor base station carries the AvailabilityCombinationsPerCell information element through RRC signaling, and configures the soft time domain resource availability of the IAB MT.
  • the specific implementation is as follows:
  • AvailabilityCombinationsPerCell is used to configure the soft time domain resource availability indication of the IAB DU cell.
  • availabilityCombinationsPerCell includes the DU cell ID, and the starting position of the bits in the DCI signaling. For example, if the starting position of the bit in the DCI signaling is the third position, it means that the Value indicated by the third bit in the DCI 2_5 signaling received by the IAB MT is the availability of the soft time domain resources of the DU cell .
  • the AvailabilityCombinationsPerCell further includes a plurality of AvailabilityCombination-r16, each AvailabilityCombination-r16 includes an ID, and the DCI indicates one or more of the IDs.
  • Each availabilityCombinationId-r16 corresponds to a resourceAvailability-r16 configuration
  • each resourceAvailability-r16 includes a sequence of values from 0 to 7, and each value represents a resource availability indication of a soft time slot.
  • the meaning of the values from 0 to 7 corresponds to the table of the 3GPP standard protocol TS 38.213v16.8.0. For details, see the mapping relationship between the resource availability indication Value and the soft resource availability type indication in the time slot shown in Table 4 below.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a space division multiplexing scenario applicable to the present application.
  • the IAB system shown in FIG. 4 includes a donor base station, an IAB node 1, an IAB node 2, UE1 and UE2.
  • the IAB node 2 is a child node of the IAB node 1, and the IAB node 2 may include but not limited to an IAB node and a special terminal device.
  • the special terminal device may be a terminal device supporting a specific NR protocol version, for example, a terminal device supporting NR Release 16/17.
  • the link communicating with the upper node is generally called the backhaul link; the link communicating with the user equipment UE is generally called the access link. That is to say, transmission between nodes can be understood as a backhaul link, and transmission involving user equipment can be understood as an access link.
  • the arrow in the figure represents the space division reception scenario of the IAB, that is, the IAB node 1 can simultaneously receive the downlink signal sent by the donor base station on the backhaul link, receive the uplink/downlink signal sent by the child node IAB node 2, and receive the access link. Downlink signal sent by user equipment UE.
  • the IAB node 1 can simultaneously send the uplink signal to the donor base station, send the uplink/downlink signal to the child node IAB node 2, and to the user equipment.
  • UE2 sends downlink signals.
  • the link between the donor base station and the IAB node 1, and the link between the IAB node 1 and the IAB node 2 are backhaul links.
  • the link between UE1 and the donor base station and the link between UE2 and IAB node 1 are access links.
  • the frequency division multiplexing in the IAB scenario mainly refers to the frequency division multiplexing between the MT module of the IAB and the DU module of the IAB. That is, IAB MT and IAB DU use resources in different frequency domains. Since the MT and DU use frequency division resources, the mutual influence between the signals sent and received by the two will be reduced.
  • the "simultaneous operation" of the MT module and the DU module specifically includes: IAB MT and IAB DU receiving and sending, there are 4 scenarios in combination, that is, MT and DU can receive signals at the same time, or send signals at the same time, or MT The DU sends the signal when receiving the signal, or the DU receives the signal when the MT sends the signal. Whether the specific scenario supports or not depends on the hardware implementation of the device.
  • “simultaneous operation” means that for the MT module/DU module, signals in two directions can be received/transmitted at the same time, instead of receiving the first signal and sending the second signal at the same time.
  • frequency division multiplexing may also include frequency division multiplexing of dual connectivity scenarios.
  • an IAB node MT
  • MT will establish a connection with two devices at the same time, that is, the IAB has two upper-level nodes for backhauling.
  • two upper nodes use different frequency domain resources to communicate with the IAB in the frequency domain, it can also be called frequency division multiplexing.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of a frequency division multiplexing scenario applicable to the present application.
  • frequency division multiplexing is performed between the IAB MT and the IAB DU, and the two are isolated by a guard band.
  • the frequency domain resources have a total bandwidth of 200M
  • the MT can occupy 100M frequency domain resources to communicate with the upper node
  • the DU can occupy another 100M frequency domain resources to communicate with the UE or the lower-level IAB node.
  • FIG. 6 is another schematic diagram of a frequency division multiplexing scenario applicable to the present application.
  • frequency division multiplexing is performed between IAB MT1 and IAB MT2, and the two are isolated by guard bands.
  • the MT can be connected to multiple upper nodes at the same time, that is, the IAB MT frequency divides resources with two upper nodes on the backhaul link, and the two upper nodes can schedule MT transmission at the same time.
  • the frequency domain resources have a total bandwidth of 200M
  • the IAB MT1 can occupy 100M frequency domain resources to communicate with the upper-level node #1
  • the IAB MT2 can occupy another 100M frequency domain resources to communicate with the lower-level IAB node #2.
  • the IAB MT module and the IAB DU module use time division resources, and the two transmit resources on different orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, which can be understood as IAB MT1 and IAB
  • the MT2 transmits the signal at the first moment
  • the IAB DU transmits the signal at the second moment.
  • the guard band between the MT and the DU needs to be considered. Constraints on the size of the guard band may be defined by a protocol, or the IAB node may report it to the donor base station. Specifically, when the frequency division (or frequency division pattern) is configured, the following aspects can be considered for the constraint condition for determining the size of the guard band:
  • the guard band when the DU cell bandwidth is greater than or equal to X1RB, or the MT CC bandwidth is greater than or equal to Y1RB, then the guard band needs at least Z1RB; for another example, when the DU cell bandwidth is greater than or equal to X2RB, or the MT CC bandwidth is greater than or equal to Y2RB , the guard band requires at least Z2RB.
  • This application does not specifically limit the required RB size between the DU cell, the MT CC and the guard band.
  • the signaling reported by the IAB node can take the following forms:
  • CC is a component carrier, which is reflected in the high-level signaling configuration as a serving cell
  • the condition also includes the frequency domain bandwidth configuration of the DU, the frequency domain bandwidth configuration of the MT, and at least the required guardband bandwidth.
  • the frequency domain bandwidth configuration includes one or more of the following: frequency domain RB number, frequency domain RBG number, frequency domain RB number range, frequency domain RBG number range, start frequency point, end frequency point, frequency domain RE number, range of frequency domain RE numbers, subcarrier spacing, etc.
  • signaling may include, but is not limited to, the following forms:
  • the IAB when the IAB works in the case 6 timing mode, it needs to reserve X RB guard bands on the MT or DU resources after frequency division; for another example, when the IAB works in the case 7 timing mode, it needs to The guard band of Y RB is reserved on the MT or DU resources; for another example, when the IAB MT is receiving and the DU is sent, or when the IAB MT is sending and the DU is received at the same time, it needs to be reserved on the frequency-divided MT or DU resources.
  • Guard band for Z RB wherein, this application does not specifically limit the sizes of X RB, Y RB, and Z RB.
  • timing type 2 case 6 can be replaced by a description in the protocol as IAB MT is sent while the DU is sent;
  • case 7 can be replaced by a description in the protocol as IAB While the MT is receiving, the DU is receiving.
  • the required guard band is Y1RB.
  • the guard band between the two will be relatively small, that is, Y1 is relatively small; for another example, when the time of MT and DU are not completely aligned, or the two
  • the required guard band is Y2RB, which can be slightly larger than Y1.
  • the units of X1 and X2 can be milliseconds, microseconds, nanoseconds, or Ts (any time unit in the protocol).
  • the reporting of the IAB to the donor base station may occur before the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB, or it may occur after the donor base station sends the frequency division configuration to the IAB.
  • the donor base station first configures a set of configurations, and the IAB finds that the guard band does not meet the requirements or its hardware capabilities after receiving it, so the IAB is triggered. These constraints are reported, and the donor base station will reconfigure the frequency division (or frequency division pattern) based on the constraints.
  • the configuration constraints of frequency division can be defined through a protocol, or the IAB node reports the configuration constraints of frequency division (or frequency division patterns) to the donor base station, and the donor base station then according to The constraint conditions configure the frequency division (or frequency division pattern).
  • the available resources after frequency division of the DU cell may include one or more of the following situations:
  • the initial partial bandwidth may be the initial uplink partial bandwidth UL BWP; alternatively, the initial partial bandwidth may also be the initial downlink partial bandwidth DL BWP; or the initial partial bandwidth may also be the larger one of the DL BWP or the UL BWP, or the smaller one;
  • the value of X here is related to the bandwidth of the DU cell; for example, a bandwidth of 100M can be divided into two frequency domain resources; a bandwidth of 200M can be divided into four consecutive frequency domain resources, etc.
  • the DU cell After frequency division, the DU cell includes at least the bandwidth of the Single Side Band (SSB);
  • SSB Single Side Band
  • the DU cell includes at least the bandwidth of the physical random access channel (PRACH) resource;
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • the DU cell After frequency division, the DU cell at least includes the bandwidth occupied by the common physical uplink control channel (common physical uplink control channel, common PUCCH) resource;
  • common physical uplink control channel common physical uplink control channel, common PUCCH
  • the DU cell After frequency division, the DU cell includes at least the bandwidth occupied by the system information block 1 (system information block #1, SIB 1).
  • the base station is connected to the core network through optical fibers.
  • the deployment cost of optical fibers is very high.
  • the wireless relay node RN establishes a connection with the core network through a wireless backhaul link, which can save part of the cost of fiber deployment.
  • a relay node establishes a wireless backhaul link with one or more upper-level nodes, and accesses the core network through the upper-level nodes.
  • the upper-level node can perform certain control (eg, data scheduling, timing modulation, power control, etc.) on the relay node through various signaling.
  • the relay node can also provide services for multiple subordinate nodes.
  • the upper-level node of the relay node may be a base station or another relay node; the lower-level node of the relay node may be a UE or another relay node.
  • an upper-level node may also be referred to as an upstream node, and a lower-level node may also be referred to as a downstream node.
  • In-band relay is a relay scheme in which the backhaul link and the access link share the same frequency band. Since no additional spectrum resources are used, in-band relay has the advantages of high spectral efficiency and low deployment cost. In-band relays generally have half-duplex constraints. Specifically, when a relay node receives a downlink signal sent by its superior node, it cannot send a downlink signal to its subordinate node. When the signal is sent, the uplink signal cannot be sent to its upper-level node.
  • the in-band relay scheme of NR is called integrated access and backhaul (IAB), and the relay node is called an IAB node.
  • the access link and the backhaul link perform resource multiplexing by time division, space division or frequency division.
  • the backhaul link and the access link work at different times, so the IAB node needs to switch between the transmission and reception of the backhaul link and the transmission and reception of the access link.
  • the backhaul and the access link are switched without interval, that is, when the access link symbol and the backhaul link symbol are continuous, the IAB node has the highest resource utilization rate.
  • the backhaul link and the access link cannot be switched without interval.
  • the IAB node needs to determine the set of available and/or unavailable symbols in the backhaul link and the access link.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an example of resource utilization under the DU time-domain resource configuration supported by the current protocol Re-16. As shown in FIG. 7 , the horizontal and vertical coordinates represent time and frequency, time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources, respectively. For the entire cell, that is, cell global ID (cell global ID, CGI) 1, time domain H, S, S, and NA resources are configured respectively.
  • cell global ID cell global ID, CGI
  • the hard (H) resources in the time domain are resources that are available to the DU, and the MT generally does not use the time domain resources for communication;
  • the not available (NA) resources in the time domain are the resources that are not available for the DU, and the MT can The time domain resource is used for communication; whether the soft(S) resource in the time domain is the availability of the DU mainly depends on the further indication of the upper node.
  • the abscissa can be regarded as the configuration of four different time domain resources in the cell, that is, the first time domain resource of the DU cell is definitely available, and whether the second and third time domain resources are available depends on the upper node. indicates that the fourth slot resource is unavailable.
  • the MT only has the configuration of the uplink/downlink transmission direction, and does not configure the H/S/NA resources. Because the upper-level node knows the resource configuration of the lower-level node, in order to avoid the conflict between the MT and the DU, the upper-level node does not schedule the MT in the first time domain resource, and the upper-level node DU sends the downlink control information (DCI) to the lower-level node. Signaling is used to further indicate whether the DU resources are available in the second and third time domains. For the fourth time domain resources, the MT can choose to schedule or not schedule resources according to transmission requirements.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • FIG. 8 is another example of resource utilization under the DU time-domain resource configuration supported by the current protocol Rel-17.
  • the horizontal and vertical coordinates represent time and frequency, time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources, respectively.
  • the scheme is to first divide the original entire cell bandwidth into multiple parts in the frequency domain, and the bandwidth sizes can be different, that is, divide the frequency domain resources (for example, resource block group 1 and resource block group 2), and refine them into frequency domain resources.
  • the granularity of the block group RBG and then configure the time-domain H/S/NA on each smaller frequency-domain granularity.
  • the abscissa can be regarded as the configuration of four different time slot resources in the cell.
  • the first time domain resource is definitely available, and whether the second and third time domain resources are available.
  • the fourth time-domain resource is unavailable;
  • the first and second time-domain resources are definitely available, and whether the third time-domain resource is available depends on the upper-level node. , the fourth time domain resource is unavailable.
  • this solution only needs to indicate the S resource in the time domain, and the S resource in the frequency domain is converted/equivalent to the S resource in the time domain on the RBG, and there is no need to define and indicate the S resource in the frequency domain, that is, It is said that the current physical layer DCI signaling for the time domain S resources can be reused to indicate whether the DU frequency domain S resources are available.
  • time domain resource configuration scheme shown in FIG. 7 is aimed at a certain cell of the DU, and this implementation is aimed at a certain section of frequency domain resources on a certain cell of the DU, that is, the resource type of the original DU cell. Further refinement to the granularity of RBG.
  • this implementation is not dynamic frequency division in the true sense. There are no "dynamic" frequency domain resources. Whether some resources in the frequency domain are available does not depend on the signaling indication of the physical layer, but is based on the original dynamic time division. Framework, dynamic frequency division based on semi-static frequency domain resource division, physical layer signaling only indicates whether time domain resources are available.
  • the semi-static frequency domain resource allocation means that the frequency domain resources of the entire cell are fixed, and it does not really indicate whether a certain part of the frequency domain resources of a certain time slot of a subordinate node is available, but indicates to the subordinate node. Whether a certain frequency domain resource block group is available in a certain time slot.
  • FIG. 9 is another example of resource utilization under the DU time-domain resource configuration supported by the current protocol Rel-17.
  • the horizontal and vertical coordinates represent time and frequency, time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources, respectively.
  • the abscissa can be regarded as the configuration of four different time slot resources in the cell.
  • the first time domain The resource H is covered by the frequency domain resource NA, and the time domain resource must be available to become the frequency domain resource unavailable;
  • the second time domain resource S is covered by the frequency domain resource H, and whether the time domain resource is available depends on the indication of the upper node to become The frequency domain must be available;
  • the third time domain resource S is covered by the frequency domain resource NA, and whether the time domain resource is available depends on the indication of the upper node and becomes unavailable in the frequency domain.
  • the frequency domain resource configuration scheme shown in Figure 8 above does not have frequency domain S resources, and whether some resources in the frequency domain are available does not depend on the signaling indication of the physical layer, and the implementation shown in Figure 9 needs to be defined. And indicate the H/S/NA resources of the DU frequency domain, so the frequency domain resource configuration can cover the time domain configuration.
  • the solutions described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 further refine the resource type of the original DU cell into the granularity of RBG, and for a certain segment of frequency domain resources on the DU cell, that is, the implicit default configuration frequency division multiplexing , and each time slot should be configured with multiple H/S/NA.
  • time division can be achieved by configuring multiple resource block groups RBGs on the same time slot or symbol as NA/H, if the system does not need to perform space division multiplexing or frequency division multiplexing most of the time, the above configuration scheme is for each When one RBG performs H/S/NA configuration, it appears redundant and complicated; for S resources that are not frequency-divided, further signaling instructions are required, which makes the DCI signaling overhead large.
  • the frequency division configuration and indication do not need to be too flexible. Whether the frequency division resources are supported is related to the hardware implementation of the device, etc. Overly flexible frequency division configuration and dynamic indication of whether S resources are available will increase unnecessary overhead. .
  • variable bandwidth may make it difficult for the UE to measure periodic reference signals, such as tracking reference signals (TRS).
  • TRS can be used for time and frequency offset tracking and can be transmitted in a periodic or aperiodic manner.
  • the TRS is transmitted in an aperiodic manner, its quasico-location (QCL) information can be identified.
  • QCL quasico-location
  • TRS is generally transmitted through a large bandwidth
  • the UE measures TRS as a QCL Type-A reference source for data demodulation; wherein, the configuration of QCL-TypeA is: ⁇ Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay , delay spread ⁇ ;
  • MT and DU frequency division resulting in DU cell bandwidth changes, periodic TRS bandwidth changes, will affect the UE, because the UE's TRS resources are semi-statically configured, generally requires a large bandwidth;
  • the impact on signals such as single-sideband SSB also needs to be considered. Because SSB is a cell-level signal, it must be ensured that the DU cell can transmit the SSB on the corresponding bandwidth resources.
  • variable bandwidth causes the DU to affect signals such as the uplink channel sounding reference signal (SRS) and the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) sent by the receiving UE.
  • SRS uplink channel sounding reference signal
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the UE often needs frequency hopping to transmit PUCCH and SRS, which is used to increase the transmit power of the UE and use channel diversity to improve its uplink coverage performance; in addition, the frequency hopping and frequency domain resources sent by the SRS and PUCCH are half Static configuration, that is, the CU is configured for the UE through RRC signaling; moreover, frequency division may cause the DU to be unable to receive signals on the resources that the UE sends SRS and PUCCH; The frequency domain resource configuration of PUCCH and SRS will obviously affect the uplink coverage performance of the UE.
  • the network can at least process the available bandwidth of DU cells in two ways: frequency division and non-frequency division. , semi-statically configure CORESET, PUCCH, TRS, SRS and other signal and channel resources under several bandwidths adapted for the UE, for example, two or three relatively small bandwidths, to avoid the signaling overhead is too large and the UE does not support Saving too much resource configuration affects normal communication and reduces system performance.
  • the present application provides a method for frequency division and indication of IAB resources. Based on a predefined frequency division resource pattern pattern, the specific allocation of frequency domain resources on some non-TDM time slots is configured; and based on the newly designed dynamic information command, indicating whether some or all of the resources are available on each non-TDM time slot.
  • This solution can realize the configuration and indication of pre-defined and configured frequency division resources on some or all of the time domain resources.
  • the de-differentiated configuration of each FDM time slot and the available frequency domain resource RBG indicating the DU are avoided, and the complexity of resource configuration and signaling overhead are reduced.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an example of the method for frequency division and indication of IAB resources applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific implementation step 1000 includes:
  • a network device eg, a donor base station
  • sends first information to a first node eg, a first IAB node
  • a terminal device eg, UE
  • the first node receives the first information from the network device information.
  • the first information includes indication information of a first pattern
  • the first pattern is one of a plurality of patterns
  • each pattern in the plurality of patterns is used to indicate the distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain
  • the At least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource
  • the first resource is a certain available resource
  • the second resource is an unavailable resource
  • whether the third resource The availability is determined by the first indication information
  • the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein the resource distributions indicated by any two patterns are different.
  • the first resource, the second resource, and the third resource may be configured for the cell of the distributed unit DU of the first node, or for the partial bandwidth BWP of the distributed unit of the first node. is configured, or is configured for part of the frequency domain resources of the distributed unit DU of the first node, such as the frequency domain resource block group RBG, the first network device is the upper node of the first node, the second network The device is a subordinate node of the first node.
  • the multiple patterns may be configured by a network device, or the multiple patterns may be predefined by a protocol, which is not limited in this application.
  • the multiple patterns are configured by a donor network device, that is, the configuration information of one or more patterns sent by the donor network device is received.
  • the configuration information of the one or more patterns may be configured by the host network device one or more times, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the host network device before the host network device configures the plurality of patterns, the host network device receives frequency division multiplexing configuration information sent from the first node, where the frequency division multiplexing configuration information includes restrictions on the configuration of the plurality of patterns condition.
  • the pattern of frequency domain resources defined by the protocol may indicate that the attribute of the multi-segment frequency domain resources is H/S/NA, and/or the pattern of frequency domain resources of various lengths is defined by the protocol.
  • the network device determines a plurality of frequency domain patterns
  • the first resource can be a frequency domain H resource (hard), indicating that the DU cell must be available in the frequency domain resource
  • the second resource can be a frequency domain NA resource (not available), indicating that the DU cell is unavailable, indicating that the resource is available to the mobile terminal (mobile-termination, MT)
  • the third resource can be the frequency domain S resource (soft), indicating whether the DU cell is available
  • the resource needs to be determined according to the superior
  • the indication information sent by the node is determined.
  • the frequency domain resource attribute (attribute) of at least one resource indicated by each pattern includes at least one of the following: H, S, NA.
  • whether the S resource is available after being further indicated may be determined as “available” or “unavailable”, or may be determined as “available” or “not indicated as available”.
  • the indication of availability may be configured for one or more of three TDD transmission direction configurations of uplink, downlink, and flexible.
  • the uplink resource of S is indicated by signaling to indicate that it is available, and the downlink and flexible resources do not indicate that it is available, and so on.
  • the first node when the at least one resource is the first resource, the first node can communicate with the terminal device and/or the lower-level relay node; when the at least one resource is the second resource, the first node cannot.
  • the first node can communicate with the first network device; when the at least one resource is a third resource, the first node needs to determine whether the third resource can be used to communicate with the terminal device according to the indication of the first network device and/or subordinate relay nodes.
  • the configuration of each pattern includes: frequency domain resource bandwidth of at least one resource, wherein each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and any two patterns have different identification information.
  • each pattern further includes a frequency domain resource attribute of at least one resource, and each frequency domain resource attribute is one of the first resource, the second resource, and the third resource. kind.
  • protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources may indicate that the attributes of the multi-segment frequency-domain resources are H/S/NA, and/or the protocol-defined pattern of frequency-domain resources of various lengths.
  • each set includes continuous frequency domain resources
  • the corresponding frequency domain resources can be selected. Domain resources are mapped into a three-segment pattern.
  • the granularity and manner of frequency domain resource division may be RBG, the number of RBs, or partial bandwidth BWP, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the protocol when the protocol only defines a frequency domain resource pattern of one length, such as a pattern with five segments in the frequency domain, then only the resources of the first three resource attributes in each pattern need to be mapped, that is, the The first three resource attributes correspond to the availability of each segment of the resource.
  • the configuration of the frequency domain resource bandwidth includes: the initial resource block number of the at least one resource and the number of resource blocks of the at least one resource.
  • the frequency domain resource bandwidth may be configured by a network device, or the frequency domain resource bandwidth may be predefined by a protocol.
  • the DU may calculate the actually indicated frequency domain bandwidth based on the bandwidth actually used by the cell. This application does not limit this.
  • each set includes continuous frequency domain resources
  • the corresponding frequency domain resources can be selected.
  • the three-segment pattern is mapped.
  • each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and the frequency domain size of each resource in the corresponding frequency domain resource pattern and the corresponding frequency domain attribute of each resource can be determined through the pattern identification.
  • the protocol when the protocol only defines a frequency domain resource pattern of one length, such as a pattern with five segments in the frequency domain, only the resources of the first three resource attributes in each pattern need to be mapped, that is, the first three resources of each pattern need to be mapped.
  • Each resource attribute corresponds to the availability of each segment of the resource.
  • each pattern has corresponding pattern identification information, and the frequency domain size of each resource in the corresponding frequency domain resource pattern and the frequency domain attribute corresponding to each resource can be determined through the pattern identification.
  • the SLIV is configured based on the start and length indications of the frequency domain resources, the start and duration lengths of the frequency domain bandwidth resources are predefined by the protocol, and the indexes of the start and end frequency domain resources of the scheduled frequency domain resources are mapped. That is, the network device can determine the starting resource block number and the number of resource blocks of the corresponding frequency domain resource through the index value, thereby configuring the frequency domain length of the frequency domain H//S/NA.
  • the first information includes identification information of at least one pattern set
  • the identification information of the at least one pattern set is used to determine at least one target pattern set
  • the at least one target pattern set includes the first pattern
  • the configuration of each pattern set includes at least one pattern among the multiple patterns, and each pattern set has corresponding pattern set identification information, and the identification information of any two pattern sets is different.
  • the first information is used to indicate the first pattern among the multiple patterns; it should be understood that the first information may only indicate one or more patterns, or may indicate a set of one or more patterns, which is not made in this application. limited.
  • the network device sends the third information to the first node and/or the terminal device; correspondingly, the first node and/or the terminal device receives the third information from the network device.
  • the third information is used to configure at least one first time slot; at least one first pattern is mapped on the at least one first time slot.
  • the first time slot is a time slot in the first time domain period, or the first time slot is a time slot corresponding to the fourth resource in the first time domain period, wherein the A time domain period corresponds to the period configured by the first time domain resource, and whether the fourth resource is available is determined by second indication information, and the second indication information is sent by the first network device.
  • the first time slot may also include all time slots in the first time domain period.
  • the first time slot here may be a non-TDM time slot, or directly referred to as an FDM time slot.
  • This application does not limit the specific name of the first time slot.
  • the first time slot only supports one function, that is, it is allowed to be Part of the time slot configuration frequency division resource configuration.
  • the present application does not limit the number of first time slots supporting this function.
  • first time slot is only an implementation manner of the time granularity, and the first symbol and the like may also be determined in the first time period, and the present application does not limit the specific time granularity.
  • the first period may correspond to the period of the time domain resource H/S/NA configuration of the first period, or a period may be configured separately, and the unit is the number of time slots, or absolute time, or a system may be used.
  • a frame is one period, and the present application does not limit the manner of determining the first period.
  • the DU calculates the number of time slots in the first cycle according to the H/S/NA configuration cycle of the time domain resources and the configured subcarrier interval, and then determines which time slots are not specific according to the number of the first time slot. TDM time slot.
  • the total number of time slots in the period is determined by taking the subcarrier spacing of the initial partial bandwidth BWP of the cell of the DU as a reference. Because under a given subcarrier interval, the total number of time slots in a system frame is fixed.
  • the referenced subcarrier spacing may be configured independently, or refer to the configuration of existing subcarrier spacing in other signaling or other application scenarios with reference to other current protocols, which is not limited in this application.
  • At least one pattern among the plurality of patterns is mapped on the first time slot, that is, based on the determined plurality of frequency domain patterns, the first time slot is configured with a frequency domain pattern.
  • it may be further indicated by the number of the frequency domain pattern, or the identification information of the frequency domain pattern.
  • the number of the at least one pattern is the same as the number of the first time slot; or the number of the at least one pattern is a positive integer multiple of the number of the first time slot, and the cycle period of the frequency domain pattern is the mapping A positive integer multiple of the period; or the number of the at least one pattern is less than the number of the first time slot, in this case, the first time slot that is not configured with a frequency domain pattern will not be frequency divided by default, for example, the first time slot defaults to Falls back to TDM time slot.
  • different frequency domain resource patterns may be mapped to the first time slot.
  • the frequency domain H resource is mapped to the first time slot, or based on the resource configuration, the frequency domain resource NA is mapped to the first time slot.
  • the frequency domain NA resource covers the frequency domain H
  • the resource that is, the availability of the frequency domain resource of the DU of the first node on the first time slot changes from a certain available resource to an unavailable resource. That is, in the mapping of the radio frequency domain resources in the time domain resources, the frequency domain H/S/NA resources can be arbitrarily combined and mapped to the first time slot. This application does not limit this, and specifically the communication requirements between the network device and the first node and/or the terminal device shall prevail.
  • any resource in the frequency domain resources H/S/NA can be mapped in the first time slot; or S+NA, that is, the first time slot is mapped first.
  • S resource and then the radio frequency domain resource NA is displayed on the S resource; or S+H, H+NA, S+H+NA, etc.
  • the application does not limit the resource mapping manner.
  • the same frequency domain resources for example, the frequency domain H resources can be respectively mapped to different time domain resources, such as time domain S, NA resources, etc., this application This is not limited.
  • the network device sends the fourth message to the first node and/or the terminal device; correspondingly, the first node and/or the terminal device receives the fourth message from the network device.
  • the fourth information is used to indicate the resource availability of the third resource; optionally, the fourth information is also used to indicate the resource availability of the fourth resource, that is, the resource whose domain resource attribute is S.
  • the fourth information may be used to indicate resource availability of time domain S resources and frequency domain S resources, and/or the fourth information may be used to indicate resource availability of frequency domain S resources on the first time slot.
  • the network device sends fifth information to the first node and/or the terminal device, where the fifth information is used to indicate the grouping information of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the first time slot; and sends sixth information, the The sixth message is used to indicate resource attributes of at least one frequency domain resource group.
  • the frequency domain resources of the DU cell are grouped through higher layer signaling (for example, RRC or F1-AP signaling).
  • the granularity and manner of frequency domain resource division may be RBG, the number of RBs, or partial bandwidth BWP, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the resource availability of the at least one frequency domain resource group is explicitly and implicitly indicated.
  • DCI signaling indicates the resource availability of at least one resource group of the IAB DU through 0/1 bits.
  • 0 indicates that the resources of the frequency domain resource group are unavailable, or indicates that the resources of the frequency domain resource group are not indicated to be available
  • 1 indicates that the frequency domain resources of the resource group are available.
  • the resource availability of the at least one resource group is implicitly indicated by the presence or absence of a bit.
  • bit value corresponding to the frequency domain resource group when the bit value corresponding to the frequency domain resource group is 1, it indicates that the resources of the frequency domain resource group are available; otherwise, if there is no bit value, it indicates that the resources of the corresponding frequency domain resource group are unavailable. If this application does not limit this.
  • a possible implementation manner is to acquire a first relationship and/or a second relationship, where the first relationship represents a corresponding relationship between the first parameter and the indication information of the availability of the first resource, and the first relationship is used to indicate the first time
  • the resource availability of the slot that is, the availability of uplink, downlink, and flexible resources of the soft time slot
  • the second relationship is used to represent the corresponding relationship between the second parameter and the indication information of the availability of the second resource
  • the second relationship is used to indicate
  • the resource availability of the frequency domain resources of the first time slot that is, the resource availability of the H/S/NA of the uplink, downlink, and flexible resources of the soft time slot
  • the first pattern is determined according to the first relationship and/or the second relationship.
  • first relationship and the second relationship may indicate the availability of all time-domain resources and the availability of all frequency-domain resources, and/or may indicate the first time slot, that is, the resources of the time slot requiring frequency division multiplexing availability, and/or may indicate the availability of frequency domain resources of the first time slot, etc., which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device sends seventh information to the first node and/or the terminal device, where the seventh information includes at least one identification information indicating a set, and the at least one identification information indicating a set is used to determine at least one target An indication set, the at least one target indication set includes a first parameter and/or a second parameter, wherein the identification information of any two indication sets is different; one or more frequencies of at least one time slot are determined according to the at least one target indication set Resource properties for domain resources.
  • the resource availability of the third resource and/or the fourth resource is determined according to the at least one target indication set.
  • the network device communicates with the first node and/or the terminal device.
  • the first node is a relay node, and it should be understood that the embodiments of the present application are applicable to a wireless communication system having a relay node.
  • the relay node may be an IAB node, or may also be a terminal device, that is, a terminal device with a wireless relay function.
  • relay nodes are generally IAB nodes.
  • the network device communicates with the first node and/or the terminal device.
  • the first time domain resource here may be understood as a set of time resources, the first time domain resource may include one or more time slots, and the multiple time slots may be continuous time slots or discontinuous time slots .
  • the one or more time slots are mapped with a first pattern for communication between the first node and the second network device and/or the terminal device.
  • different frequency-domain resource patterns may be mapped on one or more time slots of the first time-domain resource.
  • the first time domain resource may also include one or more symbols, and the present application does not limit the time granularity.
  • the network device sends the second information to the first node and/or the terminal device; correspondingly, the first node and/or the terminal device receives the second information from the network device.
  • the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource.
  • the bearer methods such as indication information and configuration information involved in this application may be, but not limited to, one of radio resource control signaling, medium access control MAC layer signaling, and physical layer PHY signaling, or at least one of them. combination of the two.
  • the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control RRC signaling;
  • the MAC layer signaling includes: MAC control element CE;
  • the physical layer signaling includes: downlink control information DCI and the like.
  • a wireless communication method and apparatus are provided, which are mapped to time-domain resources that need to be frequency-division multiplexed by pre-defining and configuring the pattern of frequency-division resources, and further indicating through signaling
  • the availability of some or all of the resources on each frequency division time slot can realize the resource configuration of the relay node.
  • the network for example, the donor base station and the IAB node
  • the network can at least divide the available bandwidth of the DU cell in two ways: frequency division and non-frequency division.
  • processing semi-statically configures the UE with signal and channel resources under several bandwidths adapted, thereby reducing signaling overhead and more conducive to improving system performance.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another example of applying the IAB resource frequency division and indication method of the present application, mainly configuring the H/S/NA in the frequency domain on some time slots, and the H/S/NA in the frequency domain is based on several patterns (patterns). ) to configure.
  • the implementation step 1100 includes:
  • the donor base station determines the time-domain H/S/NA resource configuration, and sends the time-domain H/S to each cell of the DU of the first IAB node (ie, an example of the first node). /NA resource configuration; correspondingly, the first IAB node receives the time-domain H/S/NA resource configuration from the donor base station.
  • the CU of the donor base station sends signaling to the DU, for example, higher layer signaling RRC, for indicating the configuration of the cell time domain resources.
  • the specific signaling format can refer to the standard 3GPP protocol TS 38.473 regulations, which will not be repeated here. Therefore, each cell of the DU is configured with H resources, S resources (ie, an example of the fourth resource), and NA resources in the time domain.
  • the DU of the first node communicates with subordinate nodes (eg, terminal equipment) according to resource configuration. For example, the time domain resources of cell 1 are sequentially configured as H, S, S, NA, and so on.
  • the first time domain resource of cell 1 of the DU must be available, whether the second and third time domain resources are available depends on the further indication of the upper-level node, and the fourth time domain resource is unavailable, that is, the first IAB node's resources are available.
  • the DU cannot communicate with the subordinate node and/or the terminal device in the fourth time domain resource.
  • the donor base station determines a pattern pattern of at least one frequency domain resource H/S/NA.
  • the base station configuration or protocol predefines one or more frequency-domain H/S/NA patterns. It should be understood that "a type” here mainly allows to add a new configuration through signaling, or to modify one of the configurations, so there are cases where only one pattern is included.
  • the frequency domain resources include available resources (H), non-available resources (NA), and resources to be scheduled (S), (ie, an example of the first resource, the second resource, and the third resource) to be Scheduling resources means that whether resources are available or not depends on further indications from the superior node. It should be noted that when the difference is not emphasized, the meanings to be expressed by the two are the same.
  • FIG 12 shows a schematic diagram of a pattern configuration of the frequency domain H/S/NA pattern. As shown in Figure 12, it includes N types of frequency domain patterns.
  • Frequency domain pattern 1 can be regarded as dividing the frequency domain resources of a cell into three segment, which in turn indicates that the frequency domain resources are not available NA, whether they are available depends on the further indication S of the superior node, and must be available H;
  • the frequency domain pattern 2 can be regarded as dividing the frequency domain resources of a cell into four segments, which in turn represent the frequency domain
  • the resource must be available H, whether it is available depends on the further indication S of the upper node, whether it is available H, and whether it is available depends on the further indication S of the upper node;
  • the frequency domain pattern N can be regarded as dividing the frequency domain resources of a cell into two sections , which in turn indicate that the frequency domain resource must be available H, whether it is available depends on the further indication S of the upper-level node, and so on.
  • the attributes of the multi-segment frequency domain resources are defined as hard(H), soft(S) or not available(NA).
  • the bandwidth indicated by each frequency domain resource depends on the CU of the donor base station.
  • This configuration is aimed at a specific cell of the DU, that is, the frequency domain resources of a cell are further subdivided.
  • the protocol can define multiple pattern combinations, and number and identify each of them.
  • Table 1 shows a variety of pattern combinations. As shown in Table 1, the pattern patterns H, H, S, NA, and NA represented by number 0 indicate that the frequency domain resources of the cell are divided into 5 segments, and the frequency domain resources must be available in sequence.
  • the protocol can define a variety of pattern combinations, such as H, H, NA , NA, H, or NA, H, H, H, or H, H, H, H, H, etc. It should be understood that Table 1 is only an exemplary description, and there may actually be many pattern forms, which are not listed here one by one, and should not constitute any limitation to the solution of the present application.
  • the protocol can define patterns of various lengths.
  • the frequency domain resources may be further divided into 6-segment, 7-segment and other frequency domain resources of different lengths.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the H/S/NA pattern configuration of cell frequency domain segmentation.
  • the cell of the DU is divided into three sections, which are X resource blocks RB, Y resource blocks RB and Z resource blocks RB respectively.
  • the configuration of the RBs can be arranged in sequence starting from the first RB counted from the lowest frequency point of the cell; there may also be additional configuration information for configuring the physical resource block (physical resource block) of the starting position of the RB. PRB) number.
  • the configurations of these three RBGs can be: RBG1 is the consecutive X RBs calculated from the starting frequency of the DU cell, and RBG2 is the consecutive Y RBs calculated from the first RB after the last RB of RBG1 , RBG3 is Z consecutive RBs calculated from the first RB after the last RB of RBG2, and the size of the frequency domain resource of each resource block group is not limited in this application.
  • a pattern corresponding to the frequency domain is divided into three segments can be selected. If the protocol only defines a frequency domain pattern of one length, the first few of each pattern are taken. Exemplarily, Table 1 defines five frequency domain patterns. If the cell frequency domain resources of the DU are divided into three sections, the first three resource attributes of each pattern correspond to the availability of each section of resources.
  • the attributes of the first three frequency domain patterns respectively correspond to the availability of the first three sections of resources of the cell.
  • the final configuration is: the first X RBs are NA resources (DUs are not available), the next Y RBs are S resources (whether DUs are available depends on further instructions from the superior node), and the last Z RBs are H resources (DUs must be available).
  • the attributes of multiple frequency domain resources as hard(H), soft(S) or not available(NA).
  • the bandwidth indicated by each frequency domain resource is specified by the protocol as a reference value, IAB DU Based on the bandwidth actually used by the cell, the actually indicated bandwidth is calculated.
  • the reference value specified by the protocol is determined in the form of the frequency domain resource ratio.
  • NA resources of 100Mhz ⁇ 1/2 50Mhz
  • the above-mentioned 100Mhz bandwidth is replaced with the number of resource blocks RBs for calculation, etc.
  • the donor base station configures a pattern pattern of frequency domain resources H/S/NA.
  • the donor base station can implement any form of frequency domain resource pattern configuration, and each pattern can be identified by an ID.
  • the Pattern configuration includes the frequency domain size (that is, the RB length) of each segment of resources, and the attributes of each segment of resources.
  • the frequency domain pattern configuration of the non-TDM time slot is as follows. It should be noted that the protocol may also be implemented in other ways including the same content.
  • the following table 2 shows the pattern configuration information of each frequency domain resource.
  • the frequency domain pattern whose pattern ID is RBG1 is divided into four sections, the initial RB number is 0, and the number of RBs is 1.
  • 2, 3, and 4 the corresponding frequency domain attributes are H, H, S, NA respectively;
  • the frequency domain pattern whose pattern ID is RBG 2 is divided into three sections, the initial RB number is 1, and the number of RBs is 1.
  • 2, 3, the corresponding frequency domain attributes are NA, H, S, etc., respectively.
  • Table 2 is only an exemplary illustration, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
  • the base station configures the frequency domain pattern based on the frequency domain resource start and length indicator configuration (start and length indicator value, SLIV).
  • the SLIV maps the indexes of the start and end time slots/symbols of the scheduled time domain resources through a protocol predefined table.
  • the frequency domain pattern is configured by defining the start and duration of the frequency domain bandwidth resource. It should be noted that when there are two SLIV values for a resource type, such as hard(H), there are two segments.
  • Table 3 shows the pattern configuration information of the frequency domain resources. As shown in Table 3, the combination of the partial index and the bandwidth indicated by the index is listed. Exemplarily, index 1 indicates that the resource length of which the frequency domain pattern is hard (H, frequency domain resources must be available) is 2, that is, it includes 2 resource blocks, and the resource block number at the beginning of the resource is 0; index 13 indicates that the frequency domain pattern The resource length of soft (S, whether the frequency domain resource is available depends on the further indication of the superior node) is 6, that is, it includes 6 resource blocks, and the resource block number at the beginning of the resource is 1; the index 18 indicates that the frequency domain pattern is not available.
  • H frequency domain resources must be available
  • the resource length is 1, that is, there is only one resource block, and the resource block number at the beginning of the resource is 2 and so on. It should be understood that the values in Table 3 are only examples, and there may actually be many definitions of tables, which are not listed here. In practice, the length, the starting number, and the value and range of the corresponding index are not limited. , shall not constitute any limitation to the scheme of this application.
  • the base station when defining or configuring the resource start, length and index shown in Table 3, can configure the resource start and the length of the frequency domain resource H/S/NA based on the index, for example:
  • the base station can realize the configuration of H/S/NA resources in the frequency domain of any length, continuous or discontinuous.
  • the donor base station determines multiple pattern sets, the configuration of each pattern set includes at least one pattern in the multiple patterns, wherein each pattern set has corresponding pattern set identification information, and any two pattern sets identify different information;
  • the donor base station sends first configuration information (ie, an example of the third information) to each cell of the DU of the first IAB node, where the first configuration information is used to indicate a non-TDM time slot (ie, the Example) resource configuration; correspondingly, the first IAB node receives the resource configuration information of the non-TDM time slot from the donor base station.
  • first configuration information ie, an example of the third information
  • the non-TDM time slot (or called FDM time slot) only supports a function, and this function can configure frequency division resource configuration for some time slots. It should be understood that as long as the time slot supporting this function is within the protection scope, the name of the time slot is not specifically limited in this application.
  • some time slots are configured as non-TDM time slots.
  • the time domain H/S/NA resources configured in the above step S1110 are still applicable; for non-TDM time slots, it is necessary to further determine each section of the frequency domain resources according to the frequency domain resource H/S/NA pattern. it's usable or not.
  • some time slots in a time domain period may be configured as non-TDM time slots.
  • the period of the time-domain H/S/NA configuration may be bound with the period of the time-domain H/S/NA configuration, that is, some timeslots in the period are non-TDM timeslots.
  • the time slot number of the non-TDM time slot is configured, and the DU calculates the number of time slots in the cycle according to the H/S/NA configuration period and the configured subcarrier interval, and determines which time slots are non-TDM time slots according to the number. TDM time slot.
  • the unit is the number of time slots, or absolute time (such as seconds, or milliseconds), for example, it can be called a frequency division multiplexing transmission period (FDM transmission periodicity) or non-time division multiplexing transmission Period (non-TDM transmission periodicity).
  • FDM transmission periodicity frequency division multiplexing transmission period
  • non-TDM transmission periodicity non-time division multiplexing transmission Period
  • a system frame (10 ms) is taken as a period, and the configuration directly indicates that some of the time slots are non-TDM time slots. Because under a given subcarrier interval, the total number of time slots in the system frame is fixed. Therefore, the subcarrier spacing of the initial bandwidth part (BWP) of the cell of the DU can be used as a reference to determine the total number of time slots in a period. Exemplarily, within the 60 kHz subcarrier interval, the determined total number of time slots in the system frame is 40; within the 120 kHz subcarrier interval, the determined total number of time slots in the system frame is 80 and so on. At this time, only the numbered set of non-TDM time slots may be configured, for example, the set ⁇ 5, 9, 25, 29 ⁇ indicates that the 5th, 9th, 25th, and 29th time slots are non-TDM time slots.
  • the referenced subcarrier spacing is configured separately; or the existing subcarrier spacing configuration in other signaling or other application scenarios can be referred to with reference to other current protocols, which is not limited in this application.
  • all time-domain S (whether it is available or not depends on further indication from the upper node) time slots are potential non-TDM time slots.
  • the donor base station sends indication information (that is, an example of the first information) to the first IAB node DU, where the indication information includes indication information of the first pattern, and is used to indicate that the first pattern is mapped on the non-TDM time slot. pattern; correspondingly, the first IAB node receives the indication information from the donor base station.
  • indication information that is, an example of the first information
  • the donor base station sends F1-AP signaling (ie, an example of the first information) to the first IAB node; correspondingly, the first IAB node receives the F1-AP signaling from the donor base station.
  • F1-AP signaling is used to indicate that the first pattern among the multiple patterns is applied to a corresponding time slot.
  • the F1-AP signaling can configure the frequency domain resource H/S/NA pattern pattern of many time slots (non-TDM time slots) at one time, for example, use one signaling to configure the H/S/NA pattern pattern within one configuration period The frequency domain resource H/S/NA pattern pattern of all non-TDM time slots.
  • the first IAB node receives DCI signaling, and the third information includes at least one pattern set identification information, where the at least one pattern set identification information is used to indicate at least one target pattern set.
  • the donor base station is each non-TDM time slot (or collectively referred to as a partial time slot) of each cell of the DU of the first IAB node in the cycle, respectively mapping A certain frequency domain pattern. Further, it can be indicated by pattern number (eg, pattern 1 and pattern 2).
  • the donor base station configures a frequency domain pattern for all non-TDM time slots of a period.
  • the method step S1130 for determining the specific period has already been described, and will not be repeated here. For example, if there are 4 non-TDM time slots in one configuration period, the donor base station can configure the numbers of 4 patterns. The frequency domain patterns corresponding to these four numbers will be sequentially corresponding to the four non-TDM time slots in the cycle. According to this rule, cycle back and forth in multiple cycles.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of mapping frequency domain H/S/NA patterns in periodic partial time slots. As shown in FIG. 14 , the horizontal and vertical coordinates represent time and frequency, time domain resources and frequency domain resources, respectively. For the entire cell, that is, cell global ID (cell global ID, CGI) 1, time domain H, S, S, and NA resources are configured respectively.
  • cell global ID cell global ID, CGI
  • CGI cell global ID
  • the first and second non-TDM time slots are configured as frequency domain pattern 1, which can be regarded as a subdivision of frequency domain resources. It is three segments, and the corresponding resource attributes are NA, S, and H in sequence; the third non-TDM time slot is configured as frequency domain pattern 2, which can be regarded as subdividing the frequency domain resources into four segments, and the corresponding resource attributes are as follows: H, S, H, NA.
  • the donor base station can configure three different pattern numbers, such as pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3, then the three non-TDM time slots are configured with frequency domain pattern 1, pattern 2, and pattern 3 in sequence. It should be noted that the frequency domain patterns of the non-TDM time slot mapping configured in the period may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the frequency domain resources are further subdivided into RBG granularities, which are for each segment of frequency domain resources; for the time slots without non-TDM configuration, it is for a certain DU. Cell.
  • the donor base station is allowed to configure more pattern IDs, and the number of patterns is an integer multiple of the non-TDM time slots in one cycle. For example, if there are 4 non-TDM time slots in one configuration period, the donor base station configures the numbers of 8 patterns, and the cycle period of the frequency domain pattern is twice the configuration period.
  • the number of pattern IDs configured by the donor base station is less than the number of non-TDM time slots in the period.
  • the non-TDM time slots that are not configured with pattern IDs fall back to TDM time slots by default, that is, no Perform resource frequency division. For example, if there are 3 non-TDM time slots in a configuration period, and the host base station is configured with 2 patternIDs, then only the first two non-TDM time slots can be configured with frequency domain pattern, and the third non-TDM time slot defaults to no resources. frequency division multiplexing.
  • the donor base station sends physical layer signaling DCI (ie, an example of the fourth information) to the first IAB node, which is used to indicate whether the soft(S) resource of the DU is available; correspondingly, the first IAB node receives the signal from the donor base station.
  • physical layer signaling DCI ie, an example of the fourth information
  • the uplink resources, downlink resources and flexible resources in the DU resource configuration of the first IAB node are determined by the following conditions: the attribute configuration of the slot to which it belongs and the resource type of the symbol.
  • one slot may have the following TDD transmission direction configuration: ⁇ uplink (UL) symbol, downlink (DL) symbol, flexible (flexible) symbol ⁇ .
  • the host donor node provides multiple sets of resource attribute configurations for the IAB node, and multiple sets of resource attribute configurations are respectively associated with multiple sets of resource configuration. For example, the donor node provides the IAB node with a first resource attribute configuration and a second resource attribute configuration, where the first resource attribute configuration and the second resource attribute configuration are respectively associated with the first resource type configuration and the second resource type configuration. If the donor node provides multiple sets of DU resource configurations of the DU of the IAB node for the superior node of the IAB node, the superior node needs to know the association relationship between the resource attribute configuration and the resource type configuration of the IAB node. The association relationship may be provided by the donor node for the upper-level node, or may be reported to the upper-level node by the IAB node.
  • each OFDM symbol can be used for uplink or downlink.
  • the availability of soft resources of IAB node DU needs to be indicated by the superior node, and the indication of the availability of soft resources by the superior node is also one by one. Slots are performed on a per resource type basis. Therefore, the host node can define one or more of the following 8 available states for a time slot of the IAB node DU, and each case can be indicated based on 3 bits, which are used to indicate all or part of the transmission directions in a time slot. The symbol is available, or no indication of availability. It should be noted that not indicating available is different from unavailable. There is no restriction that the child node IAB DU is unavailable on this resource. The requirement of the protocol is that the IAB DU is transmitted or not transmitted on this resource, which does not affect the co-site IAB MT. use this resource.
  • Table 4 (ie, an example of the first relationship) shows the mapping relationship between the value of the resource availability element and the time slot availability class soft resource type. As shown in Table 4, a value of 0 indicates all soft resources Does not indicate available; a value of 3 indicates that uplink and downlink resources indicate available, and flexible resources do not indicate available, etc.
  • the DCI signaling shown in Table 4 may continue to be used to indicate the S resource.
  • a new definition may be added, that is, the existing DCI signaling in the above Table 4 is used to indicate the availability of the frequency domain S resources on the non-TDM time slot. It should be understood that the protocol's indication of the S symbol or time slot is valid for the entire bandwidth. In the embodiment of the present application, for some time slots or symbols with frequency division, the above availability indication is only valid for the resources marked S in the frequency domain in the time slots or symbols.
  • the radio-frequency domain pattern is displayed in some periodic time slots. , and finally further indicate whether the frequency domain S resources are available according to the DCI signaling.
  • the main difference is reflected in the pattern configuration and definition of the newly added frequency domain resource H/S/NA, and whether the S resource in the frequency domain is available through the protocol-specified or newly added DCI signaling.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of another example of the frequency division and indication method of the IAB resource applicable to the present application, which mainly involves dynamically indicating the number of specific frequency division resources through a pattern for part of the time slot for frequency division.
  • the main difference between this specific implementation and method 1100 in the above-mentioned embodiment is that the availability of DU frequency domain resources of multiple non-TDM time slots is indicated by designing new DCI signaling.
  • the method 1500 can be used for the dynamic indication of the S resource in step S1150 of the above method 1100. To some extent, the two schemes can be superimposed and used, which is not specifically limited in this application. As shown in FIG. 15, implementing step 1500 includes:
  • the donor base station determines the time-domain H/S/NA resource configuration, and sends the time-domain H/S/NA to each cell of the DU of the first IAB node (ie, an example of the first node).
  • S/NA resource configuration correspondingly, the first IAB node receives the time-domain H/S/NA resource configuration from the donor base station.
  • the CU of the donor base station sends signaling to the DU to indicate the configuration of the time domain resources of the cell.
  • the specific signaling format can refer to the standard 3GPP protocol TS 38.473 regulations, which will not be repeated here. Therefore, each cell of the DU is configured with H resources, S resources, and NA resources in the time domain.
  • the DU of the first node communicates with a subordinate node (eg, a terminal device) according to the resource configuration.
  • the specific implementation is similar to S1110 in the foregoing method 1100. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the donor base station sends configuration information (ie, an example of the third information) to each cell of the DU of the first IAB node, where the configuration information is used to indicate the resources of the non-TDM time slot (ie, an example of the first time slot) configuration; correspondingly, the first IAB node receives configuration information from the donor base station.
  • configuration information ie, an example of the third information
  • the non-TDM time slot (or called FDM time slot) only supports a function, and this function can configure frequency division resource configuration for some time slots. It should be understood that as long as the time slot supporting this function is within the protection scope, the name of the time slot is not specifically limited in this application.
  • a possible implementation is to configure some of the time slots as non-TDM time slots (slots) in the time domain.
  • the time domain H/S/NA resources configured in the above step S1110 are still applicable; for non-TDM time slots, it is necessary to further determine each section of the frequency domain resources according to the frequency domain resource H/S/NA pattern. it's usable or not.
  • some time slots in a time domain period may be configured as non-TDM time slots.
  • the period configured by the time domain H/S/NA that is, some time slots in the period are non-TDM time slots; Time (for example, seconds, or milliseconds); or, with one system frame (10ms) as a period, the configuration directly indicates that some of the time slots are non-TDM time slots.
  • all time-domain S (whether it is available or not depends on further indication from the upper node) time slots are potential non-TDM time slots.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of an example in which some time domain resources are configured as non-TDM time slots (or FDM time slots). Configured as an FDM slot.
  • the donor base station sends the second configuration information (that is, an example of the fifth information) to the first IAB node, where the configuration information is used to indicate the configuration of the DU cell frequency domain resource segment; correspondingly, the first IAB node receives information from the donor Configuration information of the frequency domain resource segment of the base station.
  • the second configuration information that is, an example of the fifth information
  • a possible implementation manner may semi-statically subdivide the frequency domain resources of the cell of the DU into multiple segments. That is, the frequency domain resources of the cell are segmented through higher layer signaling (RRC or F1-AP signaling).
  • RRC higher layer signaling
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of an example of frequency domain segmentation of time slots or symbols of frequency division multiplexing of cells.
  • the cell frequency division time slots are segmented, such as frequency domain resources. It is divided into 3 segments, namely RBG 1, RBG 2 and RBG 3.
  • RBG 1, RBG 2 and RBG 3 the number of segments in the frequency domain.
  • non-frequency division time slots it can be regarded as divided into 3 segments, or it can be regarded as no grouping, which does not affect non-frequency division time slots.
  • the resources of the frequency division time slot have an impact, and the size of the frequency domain resource group is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the configuration method 1100 (for example, steps S1120 and S1140) in the above-mentioned first embodiment may be used semi-statically to configure the frequency-division resource H/ S/NA.
  • the specific implementation process has been described in the above steps, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the donor base station sends DCI signaling (ie, an example of the sixth information) to the first IAB node, which is used to indicate the availability of each frequency domain resource of each time slot; correspondingly, the first IAB node receives the information from the donor base station. DCI signaling.
  • DCI signaling ie, an example of the sixth information
  • each segment of the frequency domain resource of the IAB DU can be indicated by 0/1 bits of DCI signaling to be available or unavailable. Similar to the design of DCI 2_5, the DCI of the dynamic frequency domain resource can be indicated on the cell of a certain DU with a period of continuous bits, indicating the availability of the frequency division resource of each time slot on the non-TDM resource in the period.
  • the specific instructions have been described in Table 4 above, and are not repeated here for brevity.
  • FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of an example of indicating whether frequency domain resources are available through DCI signaling.
  • the frequency domain resources of the cell X of the DU are subdivided into 3 segments, which are RBG 1 , RBG 2 and RBG 3, it needs to be further indicated by 3-bit DCI signaling.
  • the DCI signaling of the cell X of the DU for the FDM resource indication is 001 010 011 010
  • the DCI signaling corresponding to the starting position of the FDM resource indication is 001, which is called frequency domain resource configuration 1
  • 3 bits of 0 /1 corresponds to the availability of RBG 1, RBG 2 and RBG 3 frequency domain resources, respectively.
  • 0 is used to indicate that the frequency domain resource is unavailable, or that the frequency domain resource is not indicated to be available, and 1 is used to indicate that the frequency domain resource is available. That is, the frequency domain resources of RBG 1 are unavailable, the frequency domain resources of RBG 2 are unavailable, and the frequency domain resources of RBG 3 are available.
  • the availability of the frequency domain resources can be indicated by two-bit DCI signaling.
  • the embodiment of the present application can also be combined with H/S/NA to configure the frequency domain resource H/S/NA semi-statically, then only the 0/1 bits of the DCI signaling can indicate whether the frequency domain S resource is available.
  • the frequency domain resources of the cell X shown in FIG. 18 are subdivided into three sections, then based on the pattern pattern of the frequency domain resources H/S/NA configured or predefined in step S1120 in the above method 1100, you can Select a pattern corresponding to three sections in the frequency domain, and only further indicate whether the S resource is available through 1-bit DCI signaling 0/1.
  • each segment of frequency domain resources may indicate a predefined configuration index through DCI signaling.
  • the predefined configuration index includes resource indications for multiple time slots/symbols.
  • the sub-IAB node receives the indication, it can determine the availability of the S resource on the cell of the DU in one or more time slots/symbols, where the S resource includes some resources with a bandwidth of S in the frequency domain.
  • the protocol predefines a correspondence table for associating the values of the indicated bits and their meanings.
  • a possible implementation is to use the table defined by the current protocol. As shown in Table 4 above, the mapping relationship between the value of the resource availability element and the availability type of the S symbol in the time slot is not repeated here for brevity. That is to say, Table 4 can be used to configure both the soft time domain resource availability indication and the soft frequency domain resource availability indication.
  • Another possible implementation is to define a new table that can indicate more situations including frequency domain resource availability. Since for a symbol configured as soft in the time domain, there may be H/S/NA in the frequency domain, and there may be different transmission direction configurations, so there are more situations that need to be indicated. Correspondingly, the number of bits required in each case may also be higher.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic diagram of an example of frequency domain resource availability of the time domain resource S.
  • the frequency domain resources are divided into three sections, and the corresponding attributes are: frequency domain resources are unavailable (NA), availability depends on further instructions from the upper node (S), and certain availability (H).
  • the bandwidth size of the frequency domain resource division in the time domain S is not limited, and the frequency domain resource attributes may consider H and/or S and/or NA, and the present application does not limit the specific frequency domain resource division.
  • Table 5 (that is, an example of the second relationship) shows the mapping relationship between the value of the resource availability element and the availability type of soft resources (including time domain and frequency domain resources), a total of 16 cases are defined, each case can be The indication is based on 4 bits, and the symbols used to indicate that all or part of the transmission directions in a time slot are available, or are not available.
  • the value of 0-7 represents the indication information of the availability of soft time domain resources
  • the value of 8-15 represents the indication information of the availability of soft frequency domain resources.
  • a value of 0 indicates that all soft time domain resources are not available; a value of 9 indicates that downlink resources are not available; a value of 14 indicates that flexible resources are available, and uplink and downlink resources are not available, etc. .
  • Table 5 is only an example, and there may actually be many definition forms of the table, which are not listed one by one here. But the core idea is to indicate the availability of S resources. In addition to considering the transmission direction UL, DL, and Flexible, you can also consider frequency domain resources H/S/NA, or only consider some time domain resources, such as frequency domain H and S resources. availability.
  • the donor base station configures multiple indication sets through higher layer signaling (eg, RRC signaling).
  • higher layer signaling eg, RRC signaling
  • a set includes multiple values in the predefined table in the first step, and each value sequentially indicates the availability of a series of timeslot resources that need to be indicated, that is, one value corresponds to one timeslot resource, and for multiple indication sets Number identification. For example, 1, 2, 3, ..., N. It should be understood that the number in the indicated set is the value column in the table. In the actual configuration, the configuration can also be converted into binary, as long as the mapping relationship between the value of the resource availability element and the availability type of the S symbol in the time slot can be guaranteed to be in one-to-one correspondence.
  • An exemplary, indication collection configuration is as follows:
  • the first time slot corresponds to the number 2, that is, '0010', with The S symbol indication for indicating the uplink is available;
  • the second, third, and sixth time slots correspond to the number 3, that is, '0011', which is used to indicate that the S symbol indication for the uplink and downlink is available;
  • the fourth and seventh time slots corresponds to the number 6, that is, '0110', and the S symbol for indicating the uplink and flexibility indicates that it is available, and the S symbol for the downlink indicates that it is not available;
  • the number 7 corresponding to the fifth time slot, that is, '0111', with S-symbols for indicating uplink, downlink and flexibility are available, etc.
  • the configured indication set has only one type, that is, the IDs included in all indication sets have a uniform range. Then, the indication set can only be based on the table defined by the current protocol, such as Table 4, and can only indicate the resource availability of DL, UL, and Flexible on the time slot S; or the indication set can be based only on the newly defined table, such as Table 5, Only the availability of DL, UL, and Flexible frequency domain resources H/S/NA on time slot S can be indicated.
  • Both configuration sets may exist, that is, the base station can either indicate through DCI whether the time domain resources of a time slot are available (that is, without frequency division), or can indicate whether the specific frequency domain resources of a time slot are available. (ie frequency division).
  • the present application also proposes the following possible implementation manners.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of another example of the wireless communication method to which the present application is applied. Specifically, it includes the following steps.
  • the network device sends configuration information to the first node.
  • the first node receives the configuration information from the network device.
  • the configuration information is used to indicate the availability of resources
  • the configuration information includes identification information of a plurality of indication sets, and each indication set includes a plurality of indications of availability of time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources;
  • S2420 The first node determines availability of the frequency domain resource and/or the time domain resource according to the configuration information.
  • the indication of frequency domain resource availability includes resource availability indication of at least one RB set group, and each RB set group includes an availability indication of RB set group resources of at least one time slot.
  • the indication of frequency domain resource availability includes a resource availability indication of at least one time slot, the at least one time slot includes a first time slot, and the first time slot further includes at least one RB set Availability indication for group resources.
  • the multiple indication sets include a first indication set and a second indication set, the first indication set corresponds to the time domain resource, and the second indication set corresponds to the frequency domain resource.
  • the indication of resource availability corresponds, and the identification information of the first indication set is different from the identification information of the second indication set.
  • a new resource availability indication configuration is designed to support both the availability indication of time division resources and the availability indication of frequency division resources.
  • the availability indication configuration includes a collection ID (AvailabilityCombinationId) of availability indications, and each ID includes one or more resource availability indications (resourceAvailability).
  • the resource availability indication may be an availability indication for time division resources or an availability indication for frequency division resources. Specifically, if the availability indication is an availability indication for time division resources, the value Value of the availability indication is used to determine the availability of the soft time slot resource. If the availability indication is an availability indication for frequency division resources, the availability indication is a sequence including one or more values, and each value in the sequence is used to indicate at least one value in a time slot.
  • Availability of soft frequency domain resources the soft frequency domain resources may be one or more RB sets (RB set), or one or more RB set groups (RB set group).
  • the availability of time division resources may be determined through a rule predefined by the configuration or the protocol. For example, only configure the rbSetGroups information element that can support frequency division resources.
  • the information element includes the resource availability indication of at least one RB set group, and may also include the number of RB set groups. Specifically, when the number of configured RB set groups is 1, the resource availability indication can be understood as indicating the availability of all frequency-domain resources in the corresponding time slot, that is, the availability of soft frequency-domain resources in one time slot can be realized.
  • Availability indication Another example is through agreement constraints.
  • the number of RB set groups is configured as 1 when configuring availability indication for time division resources. Another example is predefined by a protocol. If a time slot of a time division resource is configured with multiple resource availability indications, the availability indication of the time division resource may determine corresponding multiple RB set groups based on the first resource availability indication.
  • a soft time slot with frequency division resources is configured or an availability indication of time division resources is indicated, it can be understood that all soft frequency domain resources (that is, RBsetgroups) in the time slot are based on the configured time division resources.
  • the availability indication determines resource availability. Specifically, the following possible implementations are included.
  • Each frequency domain resource such as RB set group, indicates the resource availability of one or more time slots, respectively.
  • the first possible form of configuration signaling is as follows:
  • resourceAvailability-r17 choice indicates that the time domain resource availability indication method or the frequency domain resource availability indication method is selected.
  • the rbSetGroups-r17 may be a sequence composed of multiple RbSetGroup-r17s, and each RbSetGroup-r17 includes the frequency domain resource availability configuration of the RbSetGroup-r17, that is, it is used to represent the resource availability of each RB set group.
  • maxNrofRbSetGroups-r17 indicates the resource availability for configuring several (maximum) RB set groups, for example, it can be divided into up to 8 RB set groups in the frequency domain.
  • each RbSetGroup-r17 also includes the number of RBsets and their corresponding resource availability in the time slot, which is configured by resourceAvailability-r16.
  • maxNrofResourceAvailabilityPerCombination-r16 represents the resource availability indication used for the maximum configuration of an RB set group in time
  • INTEGER(0..7) can represent the resource availability indication of an RB set group in a time slot
  • Value ranges from 0 to 7 The meaning of , can be seen in Table 4 above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the second possible form of configuration signaling is as follows:
  • the set used for frequency division resource availability indication and the set used for time division resource availability indication include set ID, resource availability indication of frequency domain RB set groups, and maxNrofRbSetGroups indicates that the resource availability indication can include at most the number of RB set groups .
  • For each RB set group it further includes the resource availability configuration of the RB set group on one or more time slots (configured by resourceAvailability), and the number of RB sets included in each RB set group.
  • this configuration signaling can use the corresponding configuration availability indication for the number of groups of different sizes, while the first method The number of RB set groups in different time slots is relatively inflexible. .
  • the third possible form of configuration signaling is as follows:
  • rbSetGroups-r17 may be a sequence composed of multiple RbSetGroups-r17, and each RbSetGroups-r17 includes the resource availability configuration of one or more RB set groups on a time slot. Further, each RbSetGroup-r17 also includes the number of RBsets and their corresponding resource availability in the time slot, which is configured by resourceAvailability-r16. maxNrofResourceAvailabilityPerCombination indicates that the length is the maximum N time slots in time. RbSetGroup-r17 indicates the availability configuration of one or more RB set groups on each slot.
  • resourceAvailabilityRbSetGroup represents one or more Values (0 to 7). If there are multiple Value values, each value corresponds to the resource availability of an RB set group.
  • maxNrofRbSetGroups represents a maximum of 8 (0 to 7) values. maxNrofRbSets represents the number of sets per group.
  • Each time domain resource such as a time slot, indicates resource availability on one or more RB set groups, respectively. That is, if there is frequency division, each time slot indicates the resource availability of each RB set group.
  • the configuration resource availability indication includes availability indications of multiple time resources in the time domain, and the time resources may be time slots.
  • the resource availability indication is a Value value in Table 4, which is used to determine the resource availability of the time slot.
  • the resource availability indication is a Value value in Table 4, which is used to determine the resource availability of the time slot.
  • the time slot is a time slot of frequency division resources, it further includes a resource availability indication of one or more RB set groups.
  • the resource availability indication of any one of the RB set groups it further includes the value of the resource availability indication, and the value is any one of the Value values in Table 4.
  • the resource availability indication of any RB set group may also include the number of RB sets of the RB set group.
  • an additional resource availability indication configuration is designed to support the availability indication of frequency division resources. It should be understood that this configuration is independent of existing indications of availability of time division resources (eg, Table 4). In this manner, the availability indication of time division resources and the availability indication of frequency division resources can share the same availabilityCombinationId set, that is, one DCI signaling can indicate both the resource availability of time division time slots and the resource availability of frequency division time slots.
  • different availabilityCombinationIds may be configured for the availability indication of time-division resources and the availability indication of frequency-division resources. That is to say, an availabilityCombinationId is only used to configure time-division resource availability or frequency-division resource availability.
  • the availability configuration of the time division resource and the availability configuration of the frequency division resource may be independent, and both include an availabilityCombinationId.
  • the above-mentioned “resource availability indication” may be an indication manner of "first frequency domain and then time domain". For example, suppose there are 4 resource availability indicators ⁇ a,b,c,d ⁇ , which are used to indicate the resource availability of two soft time slots, and the values of a,b,c,d are Value values (0 ⁇ 7)
  • One of the soft time slot resources can be further divided into two RB set groups (RBsetgroups). At this time, it can be considered that ⁇ a,b ⁇ in the four resource availability indications is used to indicate whether the soft frequency domain resources of the two RBsetgroups in the first soft time slot are available, and ⁇ c,d ⁇ is used to indicate the second Whether the soft frequency domain resources of the two RBsetgroups of the soft time slot are available.
  • mapping method of “resource availability indication” is easier to coexist with the existing time domain resource availability indication (for example, Table 4), that is, the resource availability indication, regardless of whether the soft time slot is a frequency division time slot or not, is performed on a slot-by-slot basis.
  • the configuration of frequency division resources in the prior art is avoided to be too redundant and complicated, signaling overhead can be reduced, and system performance can be improved.
  • a variety of possible resource availability indication configurations are provided to avoid confusion and interference of time domain resource and frequency domain resource availability indication, and can be based on unified information Let the framework indicate the configuration for time-division resources and frequency-division resources configuration availability.
  • the resource block group involved in the embodiments of the present application may be replaced by a resource block set or a resource block set list or a resource block set group, which is not specifically limited in this application. Therefore, the frequency domain resource block group can be replaced with a frequency domain resource block set or a frequency domain resource block set list (list) or a frequency domain resource block set group, and the time domain resources are similar.
  • some time slots can be configured with frequency division resources, and some time slots can be configured with time division resources.
  • the resource availability indication disclosed in this application can configure both frequency division resources and time division resources.
  • the upper node for example, the donor base station
  • DCI signaling ie, an example of seventh information
  • the seventh information includes identification information of at least one indication set, which is used to indicate at least one target indication set
  • the IAB node receives the DCI signaling from the upper-level node.
  • the DCI signaling carries the above-configured indication set ID, which indicates the resource availability of the subordinate DU in multiple non-TDM time slots. It should be noted that the DCI signaling sent here includes the index value of the set, that is, the set ID.
  • the time domain H/S/NA resources are first configured, then the frequency domain resources are divided into multiple segments, and finally, whether each segment of the frequency domain resources is available is indicated by DCI signaling.
  • DCI signaling by designing a new DCI signaling, it further indicates the available resources of each DU that needs a frequency-division time slot, which avoids the complexity of configuration redundancy and reduces signaling overhead.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 10 suitable for the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 10 may be a network device (eg, a donor base station).
  • the communication device 10 includes: a transceiver unit 11 and a processing unit 12 .
  • the transceiver unit 11 is configured to send first information, where the first information includes indication information of a first pattern, the first pattern is one of a plurality of patterns, and each pattern in the plurality of patterns is used to indicate Distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain, the at least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource, the first resource is a certain available resource, the second resource The resource is an unavailable resource, and whether the third resource is available is determined by the first indication information, the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein the resource distributions indicated by any two patterns are different;
  • the processing unit 12 is configured to determine, according to the first pattern, resources for the network device to communicate with the first node and/or the terminal device, where the first node is a relay node.
  • the transceiver unit 11 is also used for the network device to communicate with the first node and/or the terminal device.
  • the resources through which the network node communicates with the first node and/or the terminal device may be located in the resources determined by the processing unit 12 .
  • the transceiver unit 11 is further configured to send second information, where the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource.
  • the processing unit 12 is further configured to, in the first time domain resource, determine the resource for communicating with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern.
  • the transceiver unit 11 is further configured to communicate with the first node and/or the terminal device in the first time domain resource, the network device.
  • the communication apparatus 10 may correspond to the network equipment (host base station) in the methods 1000/1100/1500 according to the embodiments of the present application, and the communication apparatus 10 may include the network equipment for executing the network equipment shown in FIG. 10/FIG. 11/FIG. 15.
  • each module (or unit) and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions in the communication device 10 are intended to implement the corresponding processes of the methods 1000/1100/1500, respectively.
  • the transceiver unit 11 is configured to perform S1010 and S1020 of the method 1000/1100/1500, or S1110, S1120, S1130, S1140, and S1150, or performed by a network device (eg, a donor base station) in S1510, S1520, S1530, and S1540 Actions.
  • a network device eg, a donor base station
  • FIG. 20 It should be understood that the structure of the apparatus 10 illustrated in FIG. 20 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of network equipment that may appear in the future.
  • the communication apparatus 10 may correspond to the network equipment (host base station) of the foregoing method embodiments, and the above-mentioned and other management operations and/or functions of each module (or unit) in the communication apparatus 10 are respectively In order to realize the corresponding steps of the foregoing methods, the beneficial effects in the foregoing method embodiments can also be realized.
  • processing module in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a processor
  • transceiver module or unit
  • transceiver may be implemented by a transceiver
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 20 suitable for the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 10 may be a first node, a component available for the first node (eg, a first IAB node), or a terminal device (eg, UE).
  • the communication device 20 includes: a transceiver unit 21 and a processing unit 22.
  • the transceiver unit 21 is configured to receive first information, where the first information includes indication information of a first pattern, the first pattern is one of a plurality of patterns, and each pattern in the plurality of patterns is used to indicate Distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain, the at least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource, the first resource is a certain available resource, the second resource The resource is an unavailable resource, and whether the third resource is available is determined by the first indication information, the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein the resource distributions indicated by any two patterns are different;
  • the processing unit 22 is configured to determine a resource for communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern.
  • the transceiver unit 21 is also used for the first node to communicate with the second network device and/or the terminal device.
  • the resources for the communication between the network node and the first node and/or the terminal device may be located in the resources determined by the processing unit 22 .
  • the processing unit 22 is further configured to, in the first time domain resource, determine the resource for communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern.
  • the transceiver unit 21 is further configured to receive second information, where the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource.
  • the transceiver unit 21 is further configured to communicate with the second network device and/or the terminal device in the first time domain resource.
  • the communication device 20 may correspond to the first node (the first IAB node) in the method 1000/1100/1500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 20 may include a device for executing FIG. 10/FIG. 11/FIG. 15 A module (or unit) of the method performed by the first node (the first IAB node) in the . Moreover, each module (or unit) and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions in the communication device 20 are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 1000/1100/1500.
  • the transceiver unit 11 is configured to perform S1010 and S1020 of the method 1000/1100/1500, or S1110, S1120, S1130, S1140 and S1150, or performed by the first node and/or the terminal device in S1510, S1520, S1530 and S1540 Actions.
  • the process of each module (or unit) performing the above-mentioned corresponding steps has been described in detail in the method 1000/1100/1500, and for brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 21 the structure of the apparatus 20 illustrated in FIG. 21 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of relay nodes or terminal devices that may appear in the future.
  • the communication device 20 may correspond to the first node (first IAB node) of the foregoing method embodiments, and the above-mentioned and other management operations and/or the various modules (or units) in the communication device 20 Or functions are respectively to implement the corresponding steps of the foregoing methods, so the beneficial effects in the foregoing method embodiments can also be realized.
  • processing module in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a processor
  • transceiver module or unit
  • transceiver may be implemented by a transceiver
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus (also referred to as a network device) 30 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 30 may be a network device (for example, a donor base station), or a A chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in a network device.
  • the apparatus 30 may include a processor 31 (ie, an example of a processing unit) and a memory 32 .
  • the memory 32 is used for storing instructions
  • the processor 31 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 32, so that the apparatus 30 implements the network device (for example, the donor base station) in the above method (for example, the method 1000 or the method 1100 or the method 1500). ) steps.
  • the device 30 may further include an input port 33 (ie, an example of a communication unit) and an output port 34 (ie, another example of a communication unit).
  • an input port 33 ie, an example of a communication unit
  • an output port 34 ie, another example of a communication unit.
  • the memory 32 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 31 can be used to call and run the computer program from the memory 32 to control the input port 33 to receive signals, and control the output port 34 to send signals to complete the network device in the above method. A step of.
  • the memory 32 may be integrated in the processor 31 or may be provided separately from the processor 31 .
  • the input port 33 is a receiver
  • the output port 34 is a transmitter.
  • the receiver and the transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • the input port 33 is an input interface
  • the output port 34 is an output interface
  • the functions of the input port 33 and the output port 34 can be considered to be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processor 31 can be considered to be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processor or a general-purpose chip.
  • a general-purpose computer may be used to implement the network device provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the program codes that will implement the functions of the processor 31 , the input port 33 and the output port 34 are stored in the memory 32 , and the general-purpose processor implements the functions of the processor 31 , the input port 33 and the output port 34 by executing the codes in the memory 32 .
  • the output port 34 is used to send first information, where the first information includes indication information of a first pattern, the first pattern is one of a plurality of patterns, and each of the plurality of patterns
  • the pattern is used to indicate the distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain, and the at least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource, and the first resource is a certain available resource , the second resource is an unavailable resource, and whether the third resource is available is determined by the first indication information, the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein the resource distributions indicated by any two patterns are different;
  • the processor 31 is configured to determine a resource for communicating with a first node and/or a terminal device according to the first pattern, where the first node is a relay node.
  • the output port 34 is further configured to send second information, where the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource.
  • the processor 31 is further configured to determine the resource for communicating with the first node and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern in the first time domain resource.
  • the apparatus 30 is configured in or is itself a network device, such as a donor base station.
  • modules or units in the apparatus 30 listed above are only exemplary, and the modules or units in the apparatus 30 can be used to perform the above-mentioned method 1000 or 1100 or 1500 by a network device (for example, a donor base station) For each executed action or processing procedure, the detailed description is omitted here in order to avoid redundant description.
  • a network device for example, a donor base station
  • the output port 34 is used to perform S1010 and S1020 of the method 1000/1100/1500, or S1110, S1120, S1130, S1140 and S1150, or performed by a network device (eg, a donor base station) in S1510, S1520, S1530 and S1540 actions or processes.
  • a network device eg, a donor base station
  • SoC system-on-chip
  • all or part of the functions of the device 30 are implemented by SoC technology, for example, by a network device function chip, the network device
  • the function chip integrates a processor, a memory, a communication interface and other devices, and the program related to the network equipment functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the related functions of the base station.
  • the network device function chip can also read the external memory of the chip to realize the related functions of the base station.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus (which may also be referred to as a relay device or a terminal device) 40 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 40 may be a first node (for example, a first node). IAB node), or a component available for the first node, or a terminal device (eg, UE), or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in a relay device or a terminal device.
  • the apparatus 40 may include a processor 41 (ie, an example of a processing unit) and a memory 42 .
  • the memory 42 is used for storing instructions
  • the processor 41 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 42, so that the apparatus 40 implements the first node (for example, the first node (for example, the first method) in the above method (for example, the method 1000 or the method 1100 or the method 1500). an IAB node) to perform the steps.
  • the device 40 may also include an input port 43 (ie, an example of a communication unit) and an output port 44 (ie, another example of a communication unit). It should be understood that the processor 41, the memory 42, the input port 43 and the output port 44 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals.
  • an input port 43 ie, an example of a communication unit
  • an output port 44 ie, another example of a communication unit.
  • the processor 41, the memory 42, the input port 43 and the output port 44 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 42 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 41 can be used to call and run the computer program from the memory 42 to control the input port 43 to receive signals, control the output port 44 to send signals, and complete the network device in the above method. A step of.
  • the memory 42 may be integrated in the processor 41 or may be provided separately from the processor 41 .
  • the apparatus 40 is a relay device or a terminal device
  • the input port 43 is a receiver
  • the output port 44 is a transmitter.
  • the receiver and the transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • the input port 43 is an input interface
  • the output port 44 is an output interface
  • the functions of the input port 43 and the output port 44 can be considered to be realized by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processor 41 can be considered to be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processor or a general-purpose chip.
  • a general-purpose computer may be used to implement the first node (for example, the first IAB node) provided in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the program codes that will implement the functions of the processor 41 , the input port 43 and the output port 44 are stored in the memory 42 , and the general-purpose processor implements the functions of the processor 41 , the input port 43 and the output port 44 by executing the codes in the memory 42 .
  • the input port 43 is used to receive first information, where the first information includes indication information of a first pattern, the first pattern is one of a plurality of patterns, and each of the plurality of patterns
  • the pattern is used to indicate the distribution of at least one resource in the frequency domain, and the at least one resource includes at least one of the following resources: a first resource, a second resource, and a third resource, and the first resource is a certain available resource , the second resource is an unavailable resource, and whether the third resource is available is determined by the first indication information, the first indication information is sent by the first network device, wherein the resource distributions indicated by any two patterns are different;
  • the processor 41 is configured to determine a resource for communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern.
  • the processor 41 is further configured to determine, in the first time domain resource, the resource for communicating with the second network device and/or the terminal device according to the first pattern.
  • the input port 43 is further configured to receive second information, where the second information is used to indicate the first time domain resource
  • the apparatus 40 is configured on or is itself a relay device, a first node (eg, a first IAB node), or a terminal device (eg, a UE).
  • a first node eg, a first IAB node
  • a terminal device eg, a UE
  • modules or units in the apparatus 40 listed above are only exemplary, and the modules or units in the apparatus 40 may be used to execute the first node (for example, the first IAB) in the above method 1000 or 1100 or 1500. Each action or processing process performed by the node) is omitted here in order to avoid redundant description.
  • the input port 43 may perform S1010 and S1020 of the above-described methods 1000/1100/1500, or S1110, S1120, S1130, S1140, and S1150, or S1510, S1520, S1530, and S1540 by the first node (eg, the first IAB node) ) to perform the action.
  • the first node eg, the first IAB node
  • SoC system-on-chip
  • all or part of the functions of the device 40 are implemented by SoC technology, for example, by a functional chip of a terminal device.
  • the function chip integrates devices such as processor, memory, communication interface, etc.
  • the program of the related functions of the terminal equipment is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the related functions of the user equipment.
  • the terminal device function chip can also read the external memory of the chip to realize the related functions of the user equipment.
  • FIG. 23 It should be understood that the structure of the apparatus 40 illustrated in FIG. 23 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of user equipment structures that may appear in the future.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), dedicated integrated Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • DDR SDRAM Double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination.
  • the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
  • the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored on or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted over a wire from a website site, computer, server or data center (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like containing a set of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the embodiments of the present application. implementation constitutes any limitation.
  • a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer.
  • an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components.
  • One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between 2 or more computers.
  • these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • Units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed over multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种无线通信方法和装置，该无线通信方法包括：接收包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括第一资源、第二资源、第三资源中的至少一种，第一资源是一定可用的资源，第二资源是不可用的资源，第三资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示；根据该第一图案与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信。本申请实施例的无线通信方法和装置，通过在需要频分的时隙上配置频域资源图案，并基于动态信令指示每个频分时隙上部分或全部资源是否可用性，使得频分配置不过于灵活，进而降低信令开销，提升系统性能。

Description

无线通信方法和装置
本申请要求于2021年04月02日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110363709.8、申请名称为“无线通信方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种无线通信方法和装置。
背景技术
随着移动通信技术的不断发展，频谱资源日趋紧张。为了提高频谱利用率，未来的接入网设备部署将会更加密集。在传统蜂窝网络架构下，接入网设备通过光纤实现终端设备和核心网之间的连接。然而在很多场景下，光纤的部署成本非常高昂。因此，可以采用接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul node，IAB)技术，通过中继设备与接入网设备之间的无线回传链路，实现与核心网之间的连接，从而避免大量的光纤部署所造成的较高的成本。
然而，在新空口(new radio，NR)系统中，中继节点的资源配置较为冗余复杂，并且配置开销和动态指示资源的开销过大。因此，如何对中继节点的资源进行配置，能够降低配置复杂度和信令开销是当前亟需解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种无线通信方法和装置，能够实现对中继节点的资源配置，降低资源配置的复杂度，同时降低信令开销。
第一方面，提供了一种无线通信方法，包括：接收第一信息，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；根据该第一图案与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信。
示例性的，针对第三资源的可用性，当该第一网络设备不发送该第一指示信息时，默认DU cell不可用该第三资源。
应理解，本申请适用于包括中继节点的无线通信系统，其中，该中继节点可以是IAB节点，或者还可以是终端设备，即具有无线中继功能的终端设备。其中，该第一资源、第二资源、第三资源是否可用可以是针对第一节点的分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)的小区cell进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元的部分带宽(bandwidth part，BWP)进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的部分频域资源，例如频域资源块组 (resource block group，RBG)进行配置的，该第一网络设备是第一节点的的上级节点，该第二网络设备是第一节点的下级节点。
需要说明的是，该第一资源可以为频域H资源(hard)，说明DU cell一定可用的频域资源；第二资源可以为频域NA资源(not available)，说明DU cell不可用的资源，此时移动终端(mobile-termination，MT)可用的资源；第三资源可以为频域S资源(soft)，说明DU cell是否可用该资源需要根据上级节点发送的指示信息确定。
在本申请实施例中，S资源是否可用在被进一步指示后，可以被确定为“可用”或“不可用”，或者可以被确定为“可用”或“不指示可用”。其中，是否可用的指示可以针对上行、下行、灵活三种TDD传输方向配置中的一种或多种进行配置。例如，通过信令指示S的上行资源指示可用，下行和灵活资源不指示可用等。
示例性的，当该至少一种资源是第一资源时，第一节点可以与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信；当该至少一种资源是第二资源时，第一节点不可以与终端设备进行通信，第一节点可以与第一网络设备进行通信；该至少一种资源是第三资源时，第一节点需要根据第一网络设备的指示确定第三资源是否可用于与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信。
需要说明的是，根据该第一图案与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信，包括：根据该第一图案确定该第一节点与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信的资源，该第一节点是中继节点。
根据本申请提供的方案，通过配置和定义多个频域资源图案，每个图案中包括的资源类型至少包括一定可用、不可用、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示中的至少一种，并通过第一信息指示第一图案，该第一图案用于实现网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备之间的通信。通过对频分复用的资源分配进行约束，使得网络(例如，宿主基站和IAB节点)至少可以频分和不频分DU cell的可用带宽，半静态地为终端设备(例如，UE)配置适配的几种带宽下的信号与信道资源等，避免由于频分资源的配置过于复杂，导致信令开销过大，并且UE自身可能不支持保存太多的资源配置而造成负担，所以频分资源的配置不过于灵活能够减少信令开销，提升系统性能。
应理解，不论是在本申请中频分图案pattern配置的方案中，还是按照上述可能的实现方式中半静态的配置频域资源分段的方案，或者是按照目前技术中涉及的配置多个频域资源块组RBG的方案中，都需要考虑MT与DU之间的保护带(guard band)。
示例性的，可以通过协议定义，或者IAB向宿主基站上报：在频分(或频分图案)配置时，对于确定保护带的大小的约束条件，包括：保护带与DU或者MT带宽的关系；保护带与传输定时模式之间的关系；保护带与同步状态之间的关系等。
需要说明的是，IAB向宿主基站上报，可能发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之前，也有可能发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后。
对于发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后的情况，可以理解为宿主基站先配置了一套配置下来，IAB收到后发现不满足保护带要求或其硬件能力，所以才触发IAB上报这些约束条件。
还应理解，针对不同的传输模式，协议标准上定义了不同的传输定时方案，包括case1、case6和case7。其中case 1定时模式要求IAB节点DU的发送时间与其他节点包括Donor节点相同，满足TDD系统的站间同步要求；Case6定时模式用于空分发送；case7定时模 式用于空分接收，还有可能用于上行全双工。
上述三种定时类型，规定了IAB节点的MT的上行传输定时的确定规则。其中，在定时类型2和定时类型3中，MT的上行传输定时均与DU的下行传输定时有关。应理解，在本申请实施例中，DU的下行传输定时可以根据任意方法确定。例如，结合定时类型1，DU的下行传输定时可以与IAB宿主节点的下行传输定时对齐。具体地，DU的下行传输定时可以基于空口同步信令(over-the-air synchronization，OTA synchronization)由上级节点进行指示与调整，或者DU的下行传输定时可以基于全球定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)获取，或者根据全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)或北斗等其他支持授时的系统获取。
需要说明的是，不同的定时模式即隐式的表征了传输模式，其所需要的保护带大小就可能不同。例如，全双工一般相比于空分复用，需要更多的保护带。一般在空分发送或空分接收时，为了增加MT与DU的隔离度，会采用频分复用。
示例性的，一般考虑可以在采用上述定时模式case和定时模式case时进行频分复用。
在本申请中，可以通过协议定义，或者IAB向宿主基站上报频分(或频分图案)的配置约束条件。例如:DU cell的最低频点的资源块(resource block，RB)、DU cell的最高频点的RB、DU cell频分后至少包括初始部分带宽(initial BWP)、DU cell频分后，不能有不连续的频域资源、DU cell频分后，最多被分成X段连续的频域资源、DU cell的最低频点开始的，连续X个RB、DU cell的最高频点往下的，连续X个RB等等。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在接收第一信息之前，所述方法还包括：接收配置信息。
其中，配置信息可以是指下面第十二方面或第十三方面所述的配置信息。
应理解，这里第一时域资源可以理解为时间资源集合，该第一时域资源可以包括一个或多个时隙，该多个时隙可以是连续的时隙，或者是不连续的时隙。将该一个或多个时隙上映射第一图案，用于第一节点和第二网络设备和/或终端设备之间的通信。
可选地，在该第一时域资源的一个或多个时隙上可以映射不同的频域资源图案。
可选地，第一时域资源也可以包括一个或多个符号，对于时间粒度本申请不做限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，接收第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该多个图案是宿主(donor)网络设备配置的，即接收宿主网络设备发送的一个或多个图案的配置信息。其中，该一个或多个图案的配置信息可以是宿主网络设备经过一次或多次进行配置的，本申请对此不作具体限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在宿主网络设备配置该多个图案之前，宿主网络设备接收来自第一节点发送的频分复用配置信息，该频分复用配置信息包括该多个图案配置的限制条件。
示例性的，该多个图案还可以是协议预定义的，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该每个图案的配置包括至少一种资源 的频域资源带宽，该每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，任意两个图案标识信息不同。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该每个图案的配置还包括至少一种资源的频域资源属性，该每一频域资源属性为该第一资源、该第二资源、该第三资源中的一种。
应理解，协议定义频域资源的图案可以指示多段频域资源的属性为H/S/NA，和/或协议定义多种长度的频域资源的图案。
示例性的，当第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell的频域资源被分为三段，即三个频域资源集合，每个集合包括连续的频域资源，则可以选择对应的频域资源分为三段的图案进行映射。
可选地，当协议只定义了一种长度的频域资源图案，例如频域分为五段的图案，那么只需要映射每个图案中的前三个资源属性的资源，即每个图案的前三个资源属性对应每一段资源的可用性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该频域资源带宽的配置包括至少一种资源的起始资源块编号和至少一种资源的资源块数目。
示例性的，该频域资源带宽是宿主网络设备配置的，或该频域资源带宽是协议预定义的，例如，DU基于cell实际使用的带宽，计算出实际指示的带宽。本申请对此不作限定。
示例性的，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，通过图案的标识可以确定对应的频域资源图案中每段资源的频域大小、以及每段资源对应的频域属性。
示例性的，基于频域资源起始与长度指示配置SLIV，通过协议预定义定义频域带宽资源的起始和持续长度，映射调度的频域资源的起始和结束频域资源的索引。即网络设备通过索引值可以确定对应的频域资源的起始资源块编号以及资源块的数目，从而配置频域H//S/NA的频域长度。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第一信息包括至少一个图案集合的标识信息，该至少一个图案集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标图案集合，该至少一个目标图案集合包括该第一图案，其中，每个图案集合的配置包括该多个图案中的至少一个图案，该每个图案集合具有对应的图案集合标识信息，任意两个图案集合的标识信息不同。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，接收第三信息，该第三信息用于配置至少一个第一时隙；在该至少一个第一时隙上映射至少一个第一图案。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第一时隙是第一时域周期内的时隙，或者该第一时隙是第一时域周期内时域资源为第四资源所对应的时隙，其中，该第一时域周期与该第一时域资源配置的周期对应，该第四资源是否可用由第二指示信息确定，该第二指示信息是该第一网络设备发送的。
可选地，该第一时隙还可以是第一时域周期内的所有时隙。
应理解，这里第一时隙可以是非TDM时隙，或者直接称为FDM时隙，本申请对第一时隙的具体名称不作限定，该第一时隙仅仅是支持一种功能，即允许在部分时隙配置频分的资源配置。另外，本申请对支持该功能的第一时隙的数量也不作限定。
需要说明的是，第一时隙只是时间粒度的一种实现方式，在第一时段也可以确定第一符号等，本申请对具体的时间粒度不作限定。
示例性的，该第一周期可以与第一时段的时域资源H/S/NA配置的周期对应，或者可 以单独配置一个周期，单位为时隙数，或绝对时间，又或者可以以一个系统帧为一个周期，本申请对该第一周期的确定方式不作限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，根据子载波间隔确定该第一时段和/或该第一周期内的总时隙数；根据该第一时隙的编号和/或该第一时隙的编号集合确定与该第一时隙对应的时隙数。
示例性的，DU根据时域资源H/S/NA配置周期，和该配置的子载波间隔，计算出该第一周期内的时隙数，在根据第一时隙的编号确定具体哪些时隙为非TDM时隙。
示例性的，以DU的小区cell的初始部分带宽BWP的子载波间隔为参考，确定周期内的总时隙数。由于在一个给定的子载波间隔下，系统帧内的总时隙数是固定的。
可选地，参考的子载波间隔可以是单独配置的，或者是参考其他当前协议在其他信令或其他应用场景中，已存在的子载波间隔的配置，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该至少一个图案的数目与该第一时隙的数目相同，或者该至少一个图案的数目是该第一时隙的数目的正整数倍，或者该至少一个图案的数目小于该第一时隙的数目。
可选地，在第一时隙上映射频域资源H/S/NA时，可以将不同的频域资源图案映射到该第一时隙上。示例性的，将频域H资源映射到第一时隙上，或者在该资源配置的基础上，再将频域资源NA映射到该第一时隙上，此时频域NA资源覆盖了频域H资源，即第一节点的DU在该第一时隙上的频域资源可用性从一定可用资源变成不可用资源。即在时域资源上映射频域资源中，可以将H/S/NA资源任意组合，本申请对此不作限定，具体以网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备之间的通信需求为准。
可选地，可以在第一时隙映射频域资源H/S/NA中的任一资源；或者S+NA，即在第一时隙先映射频域S资源后，再根据进一步指示信息在该S资源上映射频域资源NA；或者S+H、H+NA、S+H+NA等等，本申请对资源的映射方式不作限定。
可选地，可以将同一频域资源，例如，频域H资源分别映射到不同的时域资源上，例如时域S、NA资源等，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，接收第四信息，该第四信息用于指示该第三资源的资源可用性。
示例性的，用于指示时域S资源和频域S资源的资源可用性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，该第四信息还用于指示第四资源的资源可用性，即时域资源属性为S的资源。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，接收第五信息，该第五信息用于指示第一时隙对应的频域资源的分组信息；接收第六信息，该第六消息用于指示至少一个频域资源组的资源属性。
需要说明的是，对于频域资源划分的粒度与方式，可以是RBG，还可以是RB数，又可以是部分带宽BWP等，本申请不作具体限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，获取第一关系和/或第二关系，该第一关系是第一参数和第一资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第一关系用于指示第一时隙的资源可用性，该第二关系是第二参数和第二资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第二关系用于指示第一时隙的频域资源的资源可用性；根据该第一关系和/或该第 二关系确定第一图案。
应理解，该第一关系和该第二关系可以指示所有时域资源的可用性以及所有频域资源的可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙，也就是需要频分复用的时隙的资源可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙的频域资源的可用性等，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，接收第七信息，该第七信息包括至少一个指示集合的标识信息，该至少一个指示集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标指示集合，该至少一个目标指示集合包括第一参数和/或第二参数，其中，任意两个指示集合的标识信息不同；根据该至少一个目标指示集合确定至少一个第一时隙的一个或多个频域资源的资源属性。
在本申请中，所涉及的指示信息、配置信息等承载方式可以是但不限于：无线资源控制信令、媒体接入控制MAC层信令和物理层PHY信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制RRC信令；MAC层信令包括：MAC控制元素(control element，CE)；物理层信令包括：下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)等。
第二方面，提供了一种无线通信方法，包括：发送第一信息，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；根据该第一图案与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信，该第一节点为中继节点。
示例性的，针对第三资源的可用性，当该第一网络设备不发送该第一指示信息时，默认DU cell不可用该第三资源。
应理解，本申请适用于包括中继节点的无线通信系统，其中，该中继节点可以是IAB节点，或者还可以是终端设备，即具有无线中继功能的终端设备。其中，该第一资源、第二资源、第三资源是否可用可以是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元的部分带宽BWP进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的部分频域资源，例如RBG进行配置的，该第一网络设备是第一节点的的上级节点，该第二网络设备是第一节点的下级节点。
需要说明的是，该第一资源可以为频域H资源(hard)，说明DU cell一定可用的频域资源；第二资源可以为频域NA资源(not available)，说明DU cell不可用的资源，此时移动终端MT可用的资源；第三资源可以为频域S资源(soft)，说明DU cell是否可用该资源需要根据上级节点发送的指示信息确定。
在本申请实施例中，S资源是否可用在被进一步指示后，可以被确定为“可用”或“不可用”，或者可以被确定为“可用”或“不指示可用”。其中，是否可用的指示可以针对上行、下行、灵活三种TDD传输方向配置中的一种或多种进行配置。例如，通过信令指示S的上行资源指示可用，下行和灵活资源不指示可用等。
示例性的，当该至少一种资源是第一资源时，第一节点可以与终端设备和/或下级节点进行通信；当该至少一种资源是第二资源时，第一节点不可以与终端设备进行通信，第 一节点可以与第一网络设备进行通信；该至少一种资源是第三资源时，第一节点需要根据第一网络设备的指示确定第三资源是否可用于与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信。
需要说明的是，根据该第一图案与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信，包括：根据该第一图案确定该网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信的资源，该第一节点是中继节点。
根据本申请提供的方案，通过配置和定义多个频域资源图案，每个图案中包括的资源类型至少包括一定可用、不可用、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示中的至少一种，并通过第一信息指示第一图案，该第一图案用于实现网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备之间的通信。通过对频分复用的资源分配进行约束，使得网络(例如，宿主基站和IAB节点)至少可以频分和不频分DU cell的可用带宽，半静态地为终端设备(例如，UE)配置适配的几种带宽下的信号与信道资源等，避免由于频分资源的配置过于复杂，导致信令开销过大，并且UE自身可能不支持保存太多的资源配置而造成负担，所以频分资源的配置不过于灵活能够减少信令开销，提升系统性能。
应理解，不论是在本申请中频分图案pattern配置的方案中，还是按照上述可能的实现方式中半静态的配置频域资源分段的方案，或者是按照目前技术中涉及的配置多个频域资源块组RBG的方案中，都需要考虑MT与DU之间的保护带(guard band)。
示例性的，可以通过协议定义，或者IAB向宿主基站上报：在频分(或频分图案)配置时，对于确定保护带的大小的约束条件，包括：保护带与DU或者MT带宽的关系；保护带与传输定时模式之间的关系；保护带与同步状态之间的关系等。
需要说明的是，IAB向宿主基站上报，可能发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之前，也有可能发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后。
对于发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后的情况，可以理解为宿主基站先配置了一套配置下来，IAB收到后发现不满足保护带要求或其硬件能力，所以才触发IAB上报这些约束条件。
还应理解，针对不同的传输模式，协议标准上定义了不同的传输定时方案，包括case1、case6和case7。其中case 1定时模式要求IAB节点DU的发送时间与其他节点包括Donor节点相同，满足TDD系统的站间同步要求；Case6定时模式用于空分发送；case7定时模式用于空分接收，还有可能用于上行全双工。
上述三种定时类型，规定了IAB节点的MT的上行传输定时的确定规则。其中，在定时类型2和定时类型3中，MT的上行传输定时均与DU的下行传输定时有关。应理解，在本申请实施例中，DU的下行传输定时可以根据任意方法确定。例如，结合定时类型1，DU的下行传输定时可以与IAB宿主节点的下行传输定时对齐。具体地，DU的下行传输定时可以基于空口同步信令(OTA synchronization)由上级节点进行指示与调整，或者DU的下行传输定时可以基于全球定位系统GPS获取，或者根据全球导航卫星系统GNSS或北斗等其他支持授时的系统获取。
需要说明的是，不同的定时模式即隐式的表征了传输模式，其所需要的保护带大小就可能不同。例如，全双工一般相比于空分复用，需要更多的保护带。一般在空分发送或空分接收时，为了增加MT与DU的隔离度，会采用频分复用。
示例性的，一般考虑可以在采用上述定时模式case和定时模式case时进行频分复用。
在本申请中，可以通过协议定义，或者IAB向宿主基站上报频分(或频分图案)的配置约束条件。例如:DU cell的最低频点的RB、DU cell的最高频点的RB、DU cell频分后至少包括初始部分带宽、DU cell频分后，不能有不连续的频域资源、DU cell频分后，最多被分成X段连续的频域资源、DU cell的最低频点开始的，连续X个RB、DU cell的最高频点往下的，连续X个RB等等。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，根据第一图案与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信，包括：在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信。
应理解，这里第一时域资源可以理解为时间资源集合，该第一时域资源可以包括一个或多个时隙，该多个时隙可以是连续的时隙，或者是不连续的时隙。将该一个或多个时隙上映射第一图案，用于第一节点和第二网络设备和/或终端设备之间的通信。
可选地，在该第一时域资源的一个或多个时隙上可以映射不同的频域资源图案。
可选地，第一时域资源也可以包括一个或多个符号，对于时间粒度本申请不做限定。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，发送第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该多个图案是宿主(donor)网络设备配置的，即接收宿主网络设备发送的一个或多个图案的配置信息。其中，该一个或多个图案的配置信息可以是宿主网络设备经过一次或多次进行配置的，本申请对此不作具体限定。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，在宿主网络设备配置该多个图案之前，宿主网络设备接收来自第一节点发送的频分复用配置信息，该频分复用配置信息包括该多个图案配置的限制条件。
示例性的，该多个图案还可以是协议预定义的，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，每个图案的配置包括该至少一种资源的频域资源带宽，其中，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，任意两个图案标识信息不同。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该每个图案的配置还包括至少一种资源的频域资源属性，该每一频域资源属性为该第一资源、该第二资源、该第三资源中的一种。
应理解，协议定义频域资源的图案可以指示多段频域资源的属性为H/S/NA，和/或协议定义多种长度的频域资源的图案。
示例性的，当第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell的频域资源被分为三段，即三个频域资源集合，每个集合包括连续的频域资源，则可以选择对应的频域资源分为三段的图案进行映射。
可选地，当协议只定义了一种长度的频域资源图案，例如频域分为五段的图案，那么只需要映射每个图案中的前三个资源属性的资源，即每个图案的前三个资源属性对应每一段资源的可用性。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该频域资源带宽的配置包括至少一种资源的起始资源块编号和至少一种资源的资源块数目。
示例性的，该频域资源带宽是宿主网络设备配置的，或该频域资源带宽是协议预定义 的，例如，DU基于cell实际使用的带宽，计算出实际指示的带宽。本申请对此不作限定。
示例性的，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，通过图案的标识可以确定对应的频域资源图案中每段资源的频域大小、以及每段资源对应的频域属性。
示例性的，基于频域资源起始与长度指示配置SLIV，通过协议预定义定义频域带宽资源的起始和持续长度，映射调度的频域资源的起始和结束频域资源的索引。即网络设备通过索引值可以确定对应的频域资源的起始资源块编号以及资源块的数目，从而配置频域H//S/NA的频域长度。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第一信息包括至少一个图案集合的标识信息，该至少一个图案集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标图案集合，该至少一个目标图案集合包括该第一图案，其中，每个图案集合的配置包括该多个图案中的至少一个图案，该每个图案集合具有对应的图案集合标识信息，任意两个图案集合的标识信息不同。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，发送第三信息，该第三信息用于配置至少一个第一时隙；在该至少一个第一时隙上映射至少一个第一图案。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第一时隙是第一时域周期内的时隙，或者该第一时隙是第一时域周期内时域资源为第四资源所对应的时隙，其中，该第一时域周期与该第一时域资源配置的周期对应，该第四资源是否可用由第二指示信息确定，该第二指示信息是该第一网络设备发送的。
可选地，该第一时隙还可以是第一时域周期内的所有时隙。
应理解，这里第一时隙可以是非TDM时隙，或者直接称为FDM时隙，本申请对第一时隙的具体名称不作限定，该第一时隙仅仅是支持一种功能，即允许为部分时隙配置频分的资源配置。另外，本申请对支持该功能的第一时隙的数量也不作限定。
需要说明的是，第一时隙只是时间粒度的一种实现方式，在第一时段也可以确定第一符号等，本申请对具体的时间粒度不作限定。
示例性的，该第一周期可以与第一时段的时域资源H/S/NA配置的周期对应，或者可以单独配置一个周期，单位为时隙数，或绝对时间，又或者可以以一个系统帧为一个周期，本申请对该第一周期的确定方式不作限定。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，根据子载波间隔确定该第一时段和/或该第一周期内的总时隙数；根据该第一时隙的编号和/或该第一时隙的编号集合确定与该第一时隙对应的时隙数。
示例性的，DU根据时域资源H/S/NA配置周期，和该配置的子载波间隔，计算出该第一周期内的时隙数，在根据第一时隙的编号确定具体哪些时隙为非TDM时隙。
示例性的，以DU的小区cell的初始部分带宽BWP的子载波间隔为参考，确定周期内的总时隙数。由于在一个给定的子载波间隔下，系统帧内的总时隙数是固定的。
可选地，参考的子载波间隔可以是单独配置的，或者是参考其他当前协议在其他信令或其他应用场景中，已存在的子载波间隔的配置，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该至少一个图案的数目与该第一时隙的数目相同，或者该至少一个图案的数目是该第一时隙的数目的正整数倍，或者该至少一个图案的数目小于该第一时隙的数目。
可选地，在第一时隙上映射频域资源H/S/NA时，可以将不同的频域资源图案映射到 该第一时隙上。示例性的，将频域H资源映射到第一时隙上，或者在该资源配置的基础上，再将频域资源NA映射到该第一时隙上，此时频域NA资源覆盖了频域H资源，即第一节点的DU在该第一时隙上的频域资源可用性从一定可用资源变成不可用资源。即在时域资源上映射频域资源中，可以将H/S/NA资源任意组合，本申请对此不作限定，具体以网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备之间的通信需求为准。
可选地，可以在第一时隙映射频域资源H/S/NA中的任一资源；或者S+NA，即即在第一时隙先映射频域S资源后，再根据进一步指示信息在该S资源上映射频域资源NA；或者S+H、H+NA、S+H+NA等等，本申请对资源的映射方式不作限定。
可选地，可以将同一频域资源，例如，频域H资源分别映射到不同的时域资源上，例如时域S、NA资源等，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，发送第四信息，该第四信息用于指示该第三资源的资源可用性。
示例性的，用于指示时域S资源和频域S资源的资源可用性。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，该第四信息还用于指示第四资源的资源可用性，即时域资源属性为S的资源。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，发送第五信息，该第五信息用于指示第一时隙对应的频域资源的分组信息；发送第六信息，该第六消息用于指示至少一个频域资源组的资源属性。
需要说明的是，对于频域资源划分的粒度与方式，可以是RBG，还可以是RB数，又可以是部分带宽BWP等，本申请不作具体限定。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，获取第一关系和/或第二关系，该第一关系是第一参数和第一资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第一关系用于指示第一时隙的资源可用性，该第二关系是第二参数和第二资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第二关系用于指示第一时隙的频域资源的资源可用性；根据该第一关系和/或该第二关系确定第一图案。
应理解，该第一关系和该第二关系可以指示所有时域资源的可用性以及所有频域资源的可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙，也就是需要频分复用的时隙的资源可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙的频域资源的可用性等，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，发送第七信息，该第七信息包括至少一个指示集合的标识信息，该至少一个指示集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标指示集合，该至少一个目标指示集合包括第一参数和/或第二参数，其中，任意两个指示集合的标识信息不同；根据该至少一个目标指示集合确定至少一个第一时隙的一个或多个频域资源的资源属性。
在本申请中，所涉及的指示信息、配置信息等承载方式可以是但不限于：无线资源控制信令、媒体接入控制MAC层信令和物理层PHY信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制RRC信令；MAC层信令包括：MAC控制元素CE；物理层信令包括：下行控制信息DCI等。
第三方面，提供了一种无线通信装置，包括：收发单元，用于接收第一信息，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图 案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；处理单元，用于根据该第一图案确定与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信的资源；该收发单元，还用于第一节点和该第二网络设备和/或该终端设备进行通信。
示例性的，针对第三资源的可用性，当该第一网络设备不发送该第一指示信息时，默认DU cell不可用该第三资源。
应理解，本申请适用于包括中继节点的无线通信系统，其中，该中继节点可以是IAB节点，或者还可以是终端设备，即具有无线中继功能的终端设备。其中，该第一资源、第二资源、第三资源是否可用可以是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元的部分带宽BWP进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的部分频域资源，例如RBG进行配置的，该第一网络设备是第一节点的的上级节点，该第二网络设备是第一节点的下级节点。
需要说明的是，该第一资源可以为频域H资源(hard)，说明DU cell一定可用的频域资源；第二资源可以为频域NA资源(not available)，说明DU cell不可用的资源，此时移动终端MT可用的资源；第三资源可以为频域S资源(soft)，说明DU cell是否可用该资源需要根据上级节点发送的指示信息确定。
在本申请实施例中，S资源是否可用在被进一步指示后，可以被确定为“可用”或“不可用”，或者可以被确定为“可用”或“不指示可用”。其中，是否可用的指示可以针对上行、下行、灵活三种TDD传输方向配置中的一种或多种进行配置。例如，通过信令指示S的上行资源指示可用，下行和灵活资源不指示可用等。
示例性的，当该至少一种资源是第一资源时，第一节点可以与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信；当该至少一种资源是第二资源时，第一节点不可以与终端设备进行通信，第一节点可以与第一网络设备进行通信；该至少一种资源是第三资源时，第一节点需要根据第一网络设备的指示确定第三资源是否可用于与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信。
需要说明的是，根据该第一图案与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信，包括：根据该第一图案确定该第一节点与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信的资源，该第一节点是中继节点。
应理解，不论是在本申请中频分图案pattern配置的方案中，还是按照上述可能的实现方式中半静态的配置频域资源分段的方案，或者是按照目前技术中涉及的配置多个频域资源块组RBG的方案中，都需要考虑MT与DU之间的保护带(guard band)。
示例性的，可以通过协议定义，或者IAB向宿主基站上报：在频分(或频分图案)配置时，对于确定保护带的大小的约束条件，包括：保护带与DU或者MT带宽的关系；保护带与传输定时模式之间的关系；保护带与同步状态之间的关系等。
需要说明的是，IAB向宿主基站上报，可能发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之前，也有可能发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后。
对于发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后的情况，可以理解为宿主基站先配置了一套配置下来，IAB收到后发现不满足保护带要求或其硬件能力，所以才触发IAB上报这 些约束条件。
还应理解，针对不同的传输模式，协议标准上定义了不同的传输定时方案，包括case1、case6和case7。其中case 1定时模式要求IAB节点DU的发送时间与其他节点包括Donor节点相同，满足TDD系统的站间同步要求；Case6定时模式用于空分发送；case7定时模式用于空分接收，还有可能用于上行全双工。
上述三种定时类型，规定了IAB节点的MT的上行传输定时的确定规则。其中，在定时类型2和定时类型3中，MT的上行传输定时均与DU的下行传输定时有关。应理解，在本申请实施例中，DU的下行传输定时可以根据任意方法确定。例如，结合定时类型1，DU的下行传输定时可以与IAB宿主节点的下行传输定时对齐。具体地，DU的下行传输定时可以基于空口同步信令(OTA synchronization)由上级节点进行指示与调整，或者DU的下行传输定时可以基于全球定位系统GPS获取，或者根据全球导航卫星系统GNSS或北斗等其他支持授时的系统获取。
需要说明的是，不同的定时模式即隐式的表征了传输模式，其所需要的保护带大小就可能不同。例如，全双工一般相比于空分复用，需要更多的保护带。一般在空分发送或空分接收时，为了增加MT与DU的隔离度，会采用频分复用。
示例性的，一般考虑可以在采用上述定时模式case和定时模式case时进行频分复用。
在本申请中，可以通过协议定义，或者IAB向宿主基站上报频分(或频分图案)的配置约束条件。例如:DU cell的最低频点的RB、DU cell的最高频点的RB、DU cell频分后至少包括初始部分带宽、DU cell频分后，不能有不连续的频域资源、DU cell频分后，最多被分成X段连续的频域资源、DU cell的最低频点开始的，连续X个RB、DU cell的最高频点往下的，连续X个RB等等。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元，还用于在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案确定与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信的资源；该收发单元，还用于在第一时域资源，第一节点与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信。
应理解，这里第一时域资源可以理解为时间资源集合，该第一时域资源可以包括一个或多个时隙，该多个时隙可以是连续的时隙，或者是不连续的时隙。将该一个或多个时隙上映射第一图案，用于第一节点和第二网络设备和/或终端设备之间的通信。
可选地，在该第一时域资源的一个或多个时隙上可以映射不同的频域资源图案。
可选地，第一时域资源也可以包括一个或多个符号，对于时间粒度本申请不做限定。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于接收第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该多个图案是宿主(donor)网络设备配置的，即该收发单元，还用于接收宿主网络设备发送的一个或多个图案的配置信息。其中，该一个或多个图案的配置信息可以是宿主网络设备经过一次或多次进行配置的，本申请对此不作具体限定。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，在宿主网络设备配置该多个图案之前，该收发单元，还用于向宿主网络设备发送频分复用配置信息，该频分复用配置信息包括该多个图案配置的限制条件。
示例性的，该多个图案还可以是协议预定义的，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该每个图案的配置包括至少一种资源的频域资源带宽，该每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，任意两个图案标识信息不同。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该每个图案的配置还包括至少一种资源的频域资源属性，该每一频域资源属性为该第一资源、该第二资源、该第三资源中的一种。
应理解，协议定义频域资源的图案可以指示多段频域资源的属性为H/S/NA，和/或协议定义多种长度的频域资源的图案。
示例性的，当第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell的频域资源被分为三段，即三个频域资源集合，每个集合包括连续的频域资源，则可以选择对应的频域资源分为三段的图案进行映射。
可选地，当协议只定义了一种长度的频域资源图案，例如频域分为五段的图案，那么只需要映射每个图案中的前三个资源属性的资源，即每个图案的前三个资源属性对应每一段资源的可用性。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该频域资源带宽的配置包括至少一种资源的起始资源块编号和至少一种资源的资源块数目。
示例性的，该频域资源带宽是宿主网络设备配置的，或该频域资源带宽是协议预定义的，例如，DU基于cell实际使用的带宽，计算出实际指示的带宽。本申请对此不作限定。
示例性的，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，通过图案的标识可以确定对应的频域资源图案中每段资源的频域大小、以及每段资源对应的频域属性。
示例性的，基于频域资源起始与长度指示配置SLIV，通过协议预定义定义频域带宽资源的起始和持续长度，映射调度的频域资源的起始和结束频域资源的索引。即网络设备通过索引值可以确定对应的频域资源的起始资源块编号以及资源块的数目，从而配置频域H//S/NA的频域长度。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该第一信息包括至少一个图案集合的标识信息，该至少一个图案集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标图案集合，该至少一个目标图案集合包括该第一图案，其中，每个图案集合的配置包括该多个图案中的至少一个图案，该每个图案集合具有对应的图案集合标识信息，任意两个图案集合的标识信息不同。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于接收第三信息，该第三信息用于配置至少一个第一时隙；该处理单元，还用于在该至少一个第一时隙上映射至少一个第一图案。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该第一时隙是第一时域周期内的时隙，或者该第一时隙是第一时域周期内时域资源为第四资源所对应的时隙，其中，该第一时域周期与该第一时域资源配置的周期对应，该第四资源是否可用由第二指示信息确定，该第二指示信息是该第一网络设备发送的。
可选地，该第一时隙还可以是第一时域周期内的所有时隙。
应理解，这里第一时隙可以是非TDM时隙，或者直接称为FDM时隙，本申请对第一时隙的具体名称不作限定，该第一时隙仅仅是支持一种功能，即允许在部分时隙配置频分的资源配置。另外，本申请对支持该功能的第一时隙的数量也不作限定。
需要说明的是，第一时隙只是时间粒度的一种实现方式，在第一时段也可以确定第一 符号等，本申请对具体的时间粒度不作限定。
示例性的，该第一周期可以与第一时段的时域资源H/S/NA配置的周期对应，或者可以单独配置一个周期，单位为时隙数，或绝对时间，又或者可以以一个系统帧为一个周期，本申请对该第一周期的确定方式不作限定。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元，还用于根据子载波间隔确定该第一时段和/或该第一周期内的总时隙数；该处理单元，还用于根据该第一时隙的编号和/或该第一时隙的编号集合确定与该第一时隙对应的时隙数。
示例性的，DU根据时域资源H/S/NA配置周期，和该配置的子载波间隔，计算出该第一周期内的时隙数，在根据第一时隙的编号确定具体哪些时隙为非TDM时隙。
示例性的，以DU的小区cell的初始部分带宽BWP的子载波间隔为参考，确定周期内的总时隙数。由于在一个给定的子载波间隔下，系统帧内的总时隙数是固定的。
可选地，参考的子载波间隔可以是单独配置的，或者是参考其他当前协议在其他信令或其他应用场景中，已存在的子载波间隔的配置，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该至少一个图案的数目与该第一时隙的数目相同，或者该至少一个图案的数目是该第一时隙的数目的正整数倍，或者该至少一个图案的数目小于该第一时隙的数目。
可选地，在第一时隙上映射频域资源H/S/NA时，可以将不同的频域资源图案映射到该第一时隙上。示例性的，将频域H资源映射到第一时隙上，或者在该资源配置的基础上，再将频域资源NA映射到该第一时隙上，此时频域NA资源覆盖了频域H资源，即第一节点的DU在该第一时隙上的频域资源可用性从一定可用资源变成不可用资源。即在时域资源上映射频域资源中，可以将H/S/NA资源任意组合，本申请对此不作限定，具体以网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备之间的通信需求为准。
可选地，可以在第一时隙映射频域资源H/S/NA的任一资源；或者S+NA，即在第一时隙先映射频域S资源后，再根据进一步指示信息在该S资源上映射频域资源NA；或者S+H、H+NA、S+H+NA等等，本申请对资源的映射方式不作限定。
可选地，可以将同一频域资源，例如，频域H资源分别映射到不同的时域资源上，例如时域S、NA资源等，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于接收第四信息，该第四信息用于指示该第三资源的资源可用性。
示例性的，用于指示时域S资源和频域S资源的资源可用性。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该第四信息还用于指示第四资源的资源可用性，即时域资源属性为S的资源。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于接收第五信息，该第五信息用于指示第一时隙对应的频域资源的分组信息；该收发单元，还用于接收第六信息，该第六消息用于指示至少一个频域资源组的资源属性。
需要说明的是，对于频域资源划分的粒度与方式，可以是RBG，还可以是RB数，又可以是部分带宽BWP等，本申请不作具体限定。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元，还用于获取第一关系和/或第二关系，该第一关系是第一参数和第一资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该 第一关系用于指示第一时隙的资源可用性，该第二关系是第二参数和第二资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第二关系用于指示第一时隙的频域资源的资源可用性；该处理单元，还用于根据该第一关系和/或该第二关系确定第一图案。
应理解，该第一关系和该第二关系可以指示所有时域资源的可用性以及所有频域资源的可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙，也就是需要频分复用的时隙的资源可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙的频域资源的可用性等，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于接收第七信息，该第七信息包括至少一个指示集合的标识信息，该至少一个指示集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标指示集合，该至少一个目标指示集合包括第一参数和/或第二参数，其中，任意两个指示集合的标识信息不同；该处理单元，还用于根据该至少一个目标指示集合确定至少一个第一时隙的一个或多个频域资源的资源属性。
在本申请中，所涉及的指示信息、配置信息等承载方式可以是但不限于：无线资源控制信令、媒体接入控制MAC层信令和物理层PHY信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制RRC信令；MAC层信令包括：MAC控制元素CE；物理层信令包括：下行控制信息DCI等。
第四方面，提供了一种无线通信装置，包括：收发单元，用于发送第一信息，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；处理单元，用于根据该第一图案确定与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信的资源，该第一节点为中继节点；该收发单元，还用于网络设备与该第一节点和/或该终端设备进行通信。
示例性的，针对第三资源的可用性，当该第一网络设备不发送该第一指示信息时，默认DU cell不可用该第三资源。
应理解，本申请适用于包括中继节点的无线通信系统，其中，该中继节点可以是IAB节点，或者还可以是终端设备，即具有无线中继功能的终端设备。其中，该第一资源、第二资源、第三资源是否可用可以是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元的部分带宽(bandwidth part，BWP)进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的部分频域资源，例如RBG进行配置的，该第一网络设备是第一节点的的上级节点，该第二网络设备是第一节点的下级节点。
需要说明的是，该第一资源可以为频域H资源(hard)，说明DU cell一定可用的频域资源；第二资源可以为频域NA资源(not available)，说明DU cell不可用的资源，此时移动终端MT可用的资源；第三资源可以为频域S资源(soft)，说明DU cell是否可用该资源需要根据上级节点发送的指示信息确定的。
在本申请实施例中，S资源是否可用在被进一步指示后，可以被确定为“可用”或“不可用”，或者可以被确定为“可用”或“不指示可用”。其中，是否可用的指示可以针对上行、下行、灵活三种TDD传输方向配置中的一种或多种进行配置。例如，通过信令指示S的上行资源指示可用，下行和灵活资源不指示可用等。
示例性的，当该至少一种资源是第一资源时，第一节点可以与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信；当该至少一种资源是第二资源时，第一节点不可以与终端设备进行通信，第一节点可以与第一网络设备进行通信；该至少一种资源是第三资源时，第一节点需要根据第一网络设备的指示确定第三资源是否可用于与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信。
需要说明的是，根据该第一图案与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信，包括：根据该第一图案确定该网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信的资源，该第一节点是中继节点。
根据本申请提供的方案，通过配置和定义多个频域资源图案，每个图案中包括的资源类型至少包括一定可用、不可用、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示中的至少一种，通过第一信息指示多个图案中的第一图案，并基于该第一图案实现网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备之间的通信。
应理解，不论是在本申请中频分图案pattern配置的方案中，还是按照上述可能的实现方式中半静态的配置频域资源分段的方案，或者是按照目前技术中涉及的配置多个频域资源块组RBG的方案中，都需要考虑MT与DU之间的保护带(guard band)。
示例性的，可以通过协议定义，或者IAB向宿主基站上报：在频分(或频分图案)配置时，对于确定保护带的大小的约束条件，包括：保护带与DU或者MT带宽的关系；保护带与传输定时模式之间的关系；保护带与同步状态之间的关系等。
需要说明的是，IAB向宿主基站上报，可能发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之前，也有可能发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后。
对于发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后的情况，可以理解为宿主基站先配置了一套配置下来，IAB收到后发现不满足保护带要求或其硬件能力，所以才触发IAB上报这些约束条件。
还应理解，针对不同的传输模式，协议标准上定义了不同的传输定时方案，包括case1、case6和case7。其中case 1定时模式要求IAB节点DU的发送时间与其他节点包括Donor节点相同，满足TDD系统的站间同步要求；Case6定时模式用于空分发送；case7定时模式用于空分接收，还有可能用于上行全双工。
上述三种定时类型，规定了IAB节点的MT的上行传输定时的确定规则。其中，在定时类型2和定时类型3中，MT的上行传输定时均与DU的下行传输定时有关。应理解，在本申请实施例中，DU的下行传输定时可以根据任意方法确定。例如，结合定时类型1，DU的下行传输定时可以与IAB宿主节点的下行传输定时对齐。具体地，DU的下行传输定时可以基于空口同步信令(OTA synchronization)由上级节点进行指示与调整，或者DU的下行传输定时可以基于全球定位系统GPS获取，或者根据全球导航卫星系统GNSS或北斗等其他支持授时的系统获取。
需要说明的是，不同的定时模式即隐式的表征了传输模式，其所需要的保护带大小就可能不同。例如，全双工一般相比于空分复用，需要更多的保护带。一般在空分发送或空分接收时，为了增加MT与DU的隔离度，会采用频分复用。
示例性的，一般考虑可以在采用上述定时模式case和定时模式case时进行频分复用。
在本申请中，可以通过协议定义，或者IAB向宿主基站上报频分(或频分图案)的配置约束条件。例如:DU cell的最低频点的RB、DU cell的最高频点的RB、DU cell频分后 至少包括初始部分带宽、DU cell频分后，不能有不连续的频域资源、DU cell频分后，最多被分成X段连续的频域资源、DU cell的最低频点开始的，连续X个RB、DU cell的最高频点往下的，连续X个RB等等。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元，还用于在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案确定与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信的资源；该收发单元，还用于在第一时域资源，网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信。
应理解，这里第一时域资源可以理解为时间资源集合，该第一时域资源可以包括一个或多个时隙，该多个时隙可以是连续的时隙，或者是不连续的时隙。将该一个或多个时隙上映射第一图案，用于第一节点和第二网络设备和/或终端设备之间的通信。
可选地，在该第一时域资源的一个或多个时隙上可以映射不同的频域资源图案。
可选地，第一时域资源也可以包括一个或多个符号，对于时间粒度本申请不做限定。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于发送第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该多个图案是宿主(donor)网络设备配置的，即该收发单元，还用于宿主网络设备发送一个或多个图案的配置信息。其中，该一个或多个图案的配置信息可以是宿主网络设备经过一次或多次进行配置的，本申请对此不作具体限定。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，在宿主网络设备配置该多个图案之前，该收发单元，还用于宿主网络设备接收来自第一节点的频分复用配置信息，该频分复用配置信息包括该多个图案配置的限制条件。
示例性的，该多个图案还可以是协议预定义的，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，每个图案的配置包括该至少一种资源的频域资源带宽，其中，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，任意两个图案标识信息不同。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该每个图案的配置还包括至少一种资源的频域资源属性，该每一频域资源属性为该第一资源、该第二资源、该第三资源中的一种。
应理解，协议定义频域资源的图案可以指示多段频域资源的属性为H/S/NA，和/或协议定义多种长度的频域资源的图案。
示例性的，当第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell的频域资源被分为三段，即三个频域资源集合，每个集合包括连续的频域资源，则可以选择对应的频域资源分为三段的图案进行映射。
可选地，当协议只定义了一种长度的频域资源图案，例如频域分为五段的图案，那么只需要映射每个图案中的前三个资源属性的资源，即每个图案的前三个资源属性对应每一段资源的可用性。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该频域资源带宽的配置包括至少一种资源的起始资源块编号和至少一种资源的资源块数目。
示例性的，该频域资源带宽是宿主网络设备配置的，或该频域资源带宽是协议预定义的，例如，DU基于cell实际使用的带宽，计算出实际指示的带宽。本申请对此不作限定。
示例性的，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，通过图案的标识可以确定对应的频域 资源图案中每段资源的频域大小、以及每段资源对应的频域属性。
示例性的，基于频域资源起始与长度指示配置SLIV，通过协议预定义定义频域带宽资源的起始和持续长度，映射调度的频域资源的起始和结束频域资源的索引。即网络设备通过索引值可以确定对应的频域资源的起始资源块编号以及资源块的数目，从而配置频域H//S/NA的频域长度。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该第一信息包括至少一个图案集合的标识信息，该至少一个图案集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标图案集合，该至少一个目标图案集合包括该第一图案，其中，每个图案集合的配置包括该多个图案中的至少一个图案，该每个图案集合具有对应的图案集合标识信息，任意两个图案集合的标识信息不同。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于发送第三信息，该第三信息用于配置至少一个第一时隙；该处理单元，还用于在该至少一个第一时隙上映射至少一个第一图案。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该第一时隙是第一时域周期内的时隙，或者该第一时隙是第一时域周期内时域资源为第四资源所对应的时隙，其中，该第一时域周期与该第一时域资源配置的周期对应，该第四资源是否可用由第二指示信息确定，该第二指示信息是该第一网络设备发送的。
可选地，该第一时隙还可以是第一时域周期内的所有时隙。
应理解，这里第一时隙可以是非TDM时隙，或者直接称为FDM时隙，本申请对第一时隙的具体名称不作限定，该第一时隙仅仅是支持一种功能，即允许为部分时隙配置频分的资源配置。另外，本申请对支持该功能的第一时隙的数量也不作限定。
需要说明的是，第一时隙只是时间粒度的一种实现方式，在第一时段也可以确定第一符号等，本申请对具体的时间粒度不作限定。
示例性的，该第一周期可以与第一时段的时域资源H/S/NA配置的周期对应，或者可以单独配置一个周期，单位为时隙数，或绝对时间，又或者可以以一个系统帧为一个周期，本申请对该第一周期的确定方式不作限定。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元，还用于根据子载波间隔确定该第一时段和/或该第一周期内的总时隙数；该处理单元，还用于根据该第一时隙的编号和/或该第一时隙的编号集合确定与该第一时隙对应的时隙数。
示例性的，DU根据时域资源H/S/NA配置周期，和该配置的子载波间隔，计算出该第一周期内的时隙数，在根据第一时隙的编号确定具体哪些时隙为非TDM时隙。
示例性的，以DU的小区cell的初始部分带宽BWP的子载波间隔为参考，确定周期内的总时隙数。由于在一个给定的子载波间隔下，系统帧内的总时隙数是固定的。
可选地，参考的子载波间隔可以是单独配置的，或者是参考其他当前协议在其他信令或其他应用场景中，已存在的子载波间隔的配置，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该至少一个图案的数目与该第一时隙的数目相同，或者该至少一个图案的数目是该第一时隙的数目的正整数倍，或者该至少一个图案的数目小于该第一时隙的数目。
可选地，在第一时隙上映射频域资源H/S/NA时，可以将不同的频域资源图案映射到该第一时隙上。示例性的，将频域H资源映射到第一时隙上，或者在该资源配置的基础上， 再将频域资源NA映射到该第一时隙上，此时频域NA资源覆盖了频域H资源，即第一节点的DU在该第一时隙上的频域资源可用性从一定可用资源变成不可用资源。即在时域资源上映射频域资源中，可以将H/S/NA资源任意组合，本申请对此不作限定，具体以网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备之间的通信需求为准。
可选地，可以在第一时隙映射频域资源H/S/NA中的任一资源；或者S+NA，即在第一时隙先映射频域S资源后，再根据进一步指示信息在该S资源上映射频域资源NA；或者S+H、H+NA、S+H+NA等等，本申请对资源的映射方式不作限定。
可选地，可以将同一频域资源，例如，频域H资源分别映射到不同的时域资源上，例如时域S、NA资源等，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于发送第四信息，该第四信息用于指示该第三资源的资源可用性。
示例性的，用于指示时域S资源和频域S资源的资源可用性。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该第四信息还用于指示第四资源的资源可用性，即时域资源属性为S的资源。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于发送第五信息，该第五信息用于指示第一时隙对应的频域资源的分组信息；发送第六信息，该第六消息用于指示至少一个频域资源组的资源属性。
需要说明的是，对于频域资源划分的粒度与方式，可以是RBG，还可以是RB数，又可以是部分带宽BWP等，本申请不作具体限定。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该处理单元，还用于获取第一关系和/或第二关系，该第一关系是第一参数和第一资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第一关系用于指示第一时隙的资源可用性，该第二关系是第二参数和第二资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第二关系用于指示第一时隙的频域资源的资源可用性；该处理单元，还用于根据该第一关系和/或该第二关系确定第一图案。
应理解，该第一关系和该第二关系可以指示所有时域资源的可用性以及所有频域资源的可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙，也就是需要频分复用的时隙的资源可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙的频域资源的可用性等，本申请对此不作限定。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些实现方式中，该收发单元，还用于发送第七信息，该第七信息包括至少一个指示集合的标识信息，该至少一个指示集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标指示集合，该至少一个目标指示集合包括第一参数和/或第二参数，其中，任意两个指示集合的标识信息不同；该处理单元，还用于根据该至少一个目标指示集合确定至少一个第一时隙的一个或多个频域资源的资源属性。
在本申请中，所涉及的指示信息、配置信息等承载方式可以是但不限于：无线资源控制信令、媒体接入控制MAC层信令和物理层PHY信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制RRC信令；MAC层信令包括：MAC控制元素CE；物理层信令包括：下行控制信息DCI等。
第五方面，提供了一种第一节点和/或终端设备，包括，处理器，可选地，还包括存储器，该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该第一节点和/或终端设备执行上述第一方面 或第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
可选地，该处理器为一个或多个，该存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，该存储器可以与该处理器集成在一起，或者该存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选地，该第一节点和/或终端设备还包括收发器，收发器具体可以为发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
第六方面，提供了一种网络设备，包括，处理器，可选地，还包括存储器，该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得该网络设备执行上述第二方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
可选地，该处理器为一个或多个，该存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，该存储器可以与该处理器集成在一起，或者该存储器与处理器分离设置。
可选地，该网络设备还包括收发器，收发器具体可以为发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。
第七方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括：用于实现第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元，或者用于实现第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。
第八方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括：第一节点和/或终端设备，用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法；以及网络设备，用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第九方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序或代码，该计算机程序或代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法，第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十方面，提供了一种芯片，包括至少一个处理器，该至少一个处理器与存储器耦合，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片系统的第一节点和/或终端设备执行上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法，以及使得安装有该芯片系统的网络设备执行第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
其中，该芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口，以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。
第十一方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当该计算机程序代码被网络设备运行时，使得该第一节点和/或终端设备执行上述第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法，以及使得该网络设备执行第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十二方面，提供了一种无线通信方法，包括：接收配置信息，配置信息用于指示资源的可用性，配置信息包括多个指示集合的标识信息，每个指示集合包括多个时域资源和/或频域资源可用性的指示；根据配置信息确定频域资源和/或时域资源的可用性。
第十三方面，提供了一种无线通信方法，包括：发送配置信息，配置信息用于指示资源的可用性，配置信息包括多个指示集合的标识信息，每个指示集合包括多个时域资源和/或频域资源可用性的指示；根据配置信息确定频域资源和/或时域资源的可用性。
结合第十二方面或第十三方面，在某些实现方式中，在接收配置信息之后，所述方法还包括：接收第一信息。该第一信息可以是第一方面或第二方面所述的第一信息。
结合第十二方面或第十三方面，在某些实现方式中，频域资源可用性的指示包括至少一个RB集合组的资源可用性指示，每个RB集合组包括至少一个时隙的RB集合组资源的可用性指示。
结合第十二方面或第十三方面，在某些实现方式中，频域资源可用性的指示包括至少一个时隙的资源可用性指示，至少一个时隙包括第一时隙，第一时隙还包括至少一个RB集合组资源的可用性指示。
结合第十二方面或第十三方面，在某些实现方式中，多个指示集合包括第一指示集合和第二指示集合，第一指示集合与时域资源对应，第二指示集合与频域资源可用性的指示对应，第一指示集合的标识信息和第二指示集合的标识信息不同。
根据本申请实施例的方案，提供了一种无线通信方法和装置，通过预定义和配置频分资源的图案，映射到需要进行频分复用的时域资源上，并进一步地通过信令指示每个频分时隙上部分或全部资源的可用性，能够实现对中继节点的资源配置。通过对频分复用的资源分配进行约束，即频分配置不过于灵活，使得网络(例如，宿主基站和IAB节点)至少可以按照频分和不频分两种方式对DU cell的可用带宽进行处理，半静态地为UE配置适配的几种带宽下的信号与信道资源等，进而降低信令开销，更有利于提升系统性能。特别是针对频域配置指示和时域配置的指示集合共存的问题，提供多种可能实现的资源可用性指示配置，避免时域资源和频域资源可用性指示的混乱和干扰，并且可以基于统一的信令框架对时分的资源和频分的资源配置可用性指示配置。
附图说明
图1是适用本申请的网络架构的一例示意图。
图2是适用本申请的网络架构的另一例示意图。
图3是适用本申请的接入回传一体化IAB节点结构的一例示意图。
图4是适用本申请的空分复用场景的一例示意图。
图5是适用本申请的频分复用场景的一例示意图。
图6是适用本申请的频分复用场景的另一例示意图。
图7是当前协议支持的DU时域资源配置下的资源利用的一例示意图。
图8是当前协议支持的DU时域资源配置下的资源利用的另一例示意图。
图9是当前协议支持的DU时域资源配置下的资源利用的又一例示意图。
图10是适用本申请的无线通信方法的一例示意图。
图11是适用本申请的无线通信方法的另一例示意图。
图12是适用本申请的频域H/S/NA图案配置的一例示意图。
图13是适用本申请的小区频域分段的H/S/NA图案配置的一例示意图。
图14是适用本申请的在周期性的非TDM时隙映射频域H/S/NA图案的一例示意图。
图15是适用本申请的资源配置的方法的又一例示意图。
图16是适用本申请的部分时域资源配置为非TDM时隙的一例示意图。
图17是适用本申请的对非TDM时隙进行频域分段的一例示意图。
图18是适用本申请的通过信令指示频域资源是否可用的一例示意图。
图19是适用本申请的时域资源S的频域资源可用性的一例示意图。
图20是适用本申请的无线通信装置的一例示意图。
图21是适用本申请的无线通信装置的另一例示意图。
图22是适用本申请的网络设备的一例示意图。
图23是适用本申请的终端设备的一例示意图。
图24是适用本申请的无线通信方法的又一例示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication，GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access，CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access，WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service，GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access，WIMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th Generation，5G)系统或新无线(New Radio，NR)，也可以扩展到类似的无线通信系统中，如无线保真(wireless-fidelity，WIFI)，以及第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)相关的蜂窝系统等。
通常来说，传统的通信系统支持的连接数有限，也易于实现。然而，随着通信技术的发展，移动通信系统将不仅支持传统的通信，还将支持例如，设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信，机器到机器(machine to machine，M2M)通信，机器类型通信(machine type communication，MTC)，车联网(vehicle to everything，V2X)通信，例如，车到车(vehicle to vehicle，V2V)通信、车到基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure，V2I)通信、车到行人(vehicle to pedestrian，V2P)通信、车到网络(vehicle to network，V2N)通信等，车间通信长期演进技术(Long Term Evolution-Vehicle，LTE-V)、车联网、机器类通信(machine type communication，MTC)、物联网(Internet of Things，IoT)、机器间通信长期演进技术(Long Term Evolution-Machine，LTE-M)，机器到机器(Machine to Machine，M2M)等。
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置、软终端等，包括各种具有无线通信功能的手持设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备。终端可以是移动站(Mobile Station，MS)、用户单元(subscriber unit)、蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、智能电话(smart phone)、无线数据卡、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)电脑、平板型电脑、无线调制解调器(modem)、手持设备(handset)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、机器类型通信(Machine Type Communication，MTC)终端等。
本申请实施例中的终端设备也可以是手机(mobile phone)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、 工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、手持终端、笔记本电脑、无绳电话(cordless phone)或者无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)台、未来5G网络中的终端设备，或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络PLMN中的终端设备等。
此外，终端设备还可以是物联网(internet of things，IoT)系统中的终端设备。IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分，其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接，从而实现人机互连，物物互连的智能化网络。应理解，本申请对于终端设备的具体形式不作限定。
本申请实施例中的网络设备是一种部署在无线接入网中为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置。该设备包括但不限于：无线网络控制器(Radio Network Controller，RNC)、基站控制器(Base Station Controller，BSC)、家庭基站(例如，Home evolved NodeB，或Home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(BaseBand Unit，BBU)，无线保真系统中的接入点(Access Point，AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point，TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point，TRP)等，还可以为5G(如NR)系统中的gNB或传输点(TRP或TP)，或者5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板，或者还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点，如基带单元BBU，或分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)等。
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以包括各种形式的宏基站，微基站(也称为小站)，中继站，接入点等，可以是全球移动通讯GSM系统或码分多址CDMA中的基站(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)，也可以是宽带码分多址WCDMA系统中的基站(NodeB，NB)，还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional NodeB，eNB或eNodeB)，还可以是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器，或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、可穿戴设备或车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)网络中的网络设备等。
在一种网络结构中，网络设备可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)节点、或分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备、或者控制面CU节点(CU-CP节点)和用户面CU节点(CU-UP节点)以及DU节点的RAN设备。网络设备为小区提供服务，终端设备通过网络设备分配的传输资源(例如，频域资源)与小区进行通信，该小区可以属于宏基站，也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站，这里的小小区可以包括：城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等，这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点，适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。
图1是适用本申请的网络架构的一例示意图，如图1所示，该网络架构包括网络设备(例如，宿主基站)、中继设备(例如，IAB节点1和IAB节点2)和终端设备(例如， UE1和UE2)三类设备。其中，中继设备在网络设备计划覆盖范围外。中继设备到网络设备的距离大于终端设备到网络设备的距离。网络设备和中继设备之间的链路可以称为回传(backhaul，BH)链路，中继设备和终端设备之间的链路可以称为接入(access，AC)链路。
需要说明的是，本申请对网络设备和中继设备、中继设备和网络设备之间的链路名称、以及中继设备和终端设备之间的链路名称不进行限定。网络设备还可以称为“供体网络设备”或“宿主网络设备”或“宿主基站”或“中继设备”。其中，宿主基站可以是一个具有完整基站功能的接入网网元，还可以是集中式单元CU和分布式单元DU分离形态的接入网网元。
在本申请实施例中，网络设备可以是IAB节点，或用于中继通信的节点。中继设备可以部署在相比在终端设备离基站或接入设备更远的地方，该接入设备可以是另一个中继设备。另外，中继设备的名称可以是中继节点(relaying node，RN)，中继传输接收点(relaying transmission and reception point，rTRP)，或者集成接入和回传节点(integrated access and backhaul node，IAB node)，中继节点的上级节点可以是gNB(包括gNB-DU，gNB-CU等)，也可以是另一个中继节点。
应理解，本申请适用于具有中继节点的无线通信系统。尽管图1给出的是中继设备通过无线空口直接连接到网络设备，但是IAB中继系统可以支持多级中继，即IAB节点可以与一个或多个上级节点建立无线回传链路，并通过该一个或多个上级节点接入宿主基站。同样的，一个IAB节点还可以为一个或多个下级节点提供服务。宿主基站可以与IAB节点1通信，也可以直接与用户设备UE1通信；同样地，IAB节点1可以与IAB节点2通信，也可以与用户设备UE2通信等。
图2是适用本申请的网络架构的另一例示意图，如图2所示，宿主基站从功能、逻辑上可以进一步划分为CU与DU，IAB节点内部从功能、逻辑上可以进一步划分为移动终端(mobile-termination，MT)模块和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)模块。
MT功能被定义为类似UE的一个组件。在IAB中，MT被称为驻留在IAB节点上的功能。由于MT类似一个普通UE的功能，那么可以理解为IAB节点通过MT接入到上级节点或网络。
DU功能是相对于CU功能而言的。在5G NR中，基站功能被分为两部分，称为CU-DU分离。从协议栈角度，CU包括了原LTE基站的无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层和分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层，DU包括了无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层和物理(physical，PHY)层。在普通5G基站部署中，CU与DU物理上可以通过光纤连接，逻辑上存在一个专门定义的F1接口，用于CU与DU之间进行通信。从功能的角度，CU主要负责处理非实时协议和服务，如无线资源控制与配置，跨小区移动性管理，承载管理等；DU主要负责处理物理层协议和实时服务，如调度，物理信号生成与发送。这些协议层的功能可以由一个节点实现，或者可以由多个节点实现；例如，在一种演进结构中，RAN设备可以包括集中单元CU和分布单元DU，多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。
示例性的，CU与DU之间进行下行传输，CU生成的F1-AP数据包被封装成IP包，在空口多跳节点(例如，IAB节点1和IAB节点2)之间传递。数据包到达目标IAB节点 后，在目标IAB的MT模块适配层处理后，将数据包转给本地IAB的DU模块进行处理，最终在DU解析到F1-AP数据包。
在以上网络架构中，CU产生的信令可以通过DU发送给终端设备，或者终端设备产生的信令可以通过DU发送给CU。DU可以不对该信令进行解析而直接通过协议层封装而透传给终端设备或CU。
图3是适用本申请的接入回传一体化IAB节点结构的一例示意图，如图3所示，IAB节点可以分为MT模块和DU模块，其中，可以将IAB节点作为执行终端设备的功能称为移动终端MT侧或MT功能模块，即IAB节点通过MT与上级节点进行通信；将IAB节点作为类似基站的接入网设备称为分布式单元DU侧或DU功能模块，即IAB节点通过DU与下级节点和UE进行通信。IAB节点的MT与DU均具有完整的收发模块，且两者之间具有接口。
需要说明的是，MT与DU为逻辑模块，在实际中，两者可以共享部分子模块，例如可共用收发天线，基带处理模块等。
在通信过程中，IAB节点的回传链路与接入链路的空口资源需要由宿主基站或者上级节点进行配置。IAB节点的资源配置可以包括MT资源配置和DU资源配置。其中，MT资源配置用于指示IAB节点的MT与上级节点进行通信时的资源配置，IAB节点的MT资源可被配置为上行(uplink，UL)、下行(downlink，DL)、灵活(flexible，F)三种类型。DU资源配置用于指示IAB节点的DU与下级节点进行通信时的资源配置，IAB节点的DU资源可被配置为上行(uplink，UL)、下行(downlink，DL)、灵活(flexible，F)三种类型。IAB节点的DU资源配置由上级节点或宿主基站通过接口信令进行指示。
应理解，上述通信系统和网络架构仅是示例性说明，是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题同样适用。例如，通信系统还可以包括核心网设备，核心网设备可以与多个接入网设备连接，用于控制接入网设备，并且，可以将从网络侧(例如，互联网)接收到的数据分发至接入网设备。
本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备，或者，是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块；或者是可用于终端设备或网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。
另外，本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于：磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。
为了描述方便，下面首先对本申请实施例涉及的术语进行说明。
1、保护带：指MT和DU在频域资源的使用中，预留的部分带宽资源。即MT和DU在该带宽资源上既不发送信号，也不接收信号，这样可以避免MT和DU之间的相关干扰。
2、定时模式：指在协议中针对不同的传输模式，定义的不同的传输定时方案，包括下面三种不同的定时类型。
示例性的，在时分复用(time division multiplexing，TDM)模式中使用标准中的定时类型1:case #1 timing，即DU的发送时间。应理解，IAB节点的MT根据上级节点的定时提前量(timing advance，TA)指示信息，确定上行传输定时。IAB节点的DU的下行发送定时，在不同的节点的DU之间对齐。也就是说，case #1 timing定时模式要求IAB节点DU的发送时间与其他节点包括宿主节点donor相同，满足TDD系统的站间同步要求。
示例性的，定时类型2:case #6 timing定时模式用于空分发送。应理解，IAB节点的MT的上行发送定时与IAB节点的DU的下行发送定时需要对齐。
示例性的，定时类型3:case #7 timing定时模式用于空分接收，还有可能用于上行全双工。应理解，IAB节点的MT的上行接收定时与IAB节点的DU的下行接收定时需要对齐。
需要说明的是，IAB节点的DU和MT实现空分复用是指：DU进行下行发送时，MT进行上行发送。DU进行上行接收时，MT进行下行接收。换句话说，DU进行下行发送时，MT进行上行发送，可以简述为IAB节点同时发送的空分复用场景；DU进行上行接收时，MT进行下行接收，可以简述为IAB节点同时接收的空分复用场景。
进一步地，上述定时类型1可以适用于IAB节点的MT和DU时分复用的情况；上述定时类型2可以适用于IAB节点同时发送的空分复用场景；上述定时类型3可以适用于IAB节点同时接收的空分复用场景。
综上所述，上述三种定时类型，规定了IAB节点的MT的上行传输定时的确定规则。其中，在定时类型2和定时类型3中，MT的上行传输定时均与DU的下行传输定时有关。应理解，在本申请实施例中，DU的下行传输定时可以根据任意方法确定。例如，结合定时类型1，DU的下行传输定时可以与IAB宿主节点的下行传输定时对齐。具体地，DU的下行传输定时可以基于空口同步信令(over-the-air synchronization，OTA synchronization)由上级节点进行指示与调整，或者DU的下行传输定时可以基于全球定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)获取，或者根据全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)或北斗等其他支持授时的系统获取。
所以，不同的定时模式即隐式地表征了传输模式，其所需要的保护带大小也就可能不同。例如，全双工一般相比于空分复用，需要更多的保护带。
3、频分复用的约束定时模式：一般在空分发送或空分接收时，为了增加MT与DU的隔离度，会采用频分复用。
示例性的，一般考虑可以在采用上述定时模式case #6 timing和定时模式case #7 timing时进行频分复用。
4、上级节点：在上行传输时，接收数据或信号的节点，或者下行传输时发送数据或信号的节点；把提供无线回传链路资源的节点、网络设备，称为中继设备的上级点。
5、下级节点：在上行传输时，发送数据或信号的节点，或者下行传输时接收数据或信号的节点；把使用回传链路资源向网络进行数据传输，或者接收来自网络的数据的节点 称为下级节点，例如，中继设备称为网络设备的下级节点，网络为核心网或者其他接入网之上的网络，如因特网，专网等。
6、接入链路：接入链路是指某个节点和它的下级节点进行通信时所使用的无线链路，包括上行传输和下行传输的链路。接入链路上的上行传输也被称为接入链路的上行传输，下行传输也被称为接入链路的下行传输。其中的节点包括但不限于前述IAB节点。
7、回传链路：回传链路是指某个节点和它的上级节点和/或下级节点进行通信时所使用的无线链路，包括上行传输和下行传输的链路。回传链路上的上行传输也被称为回传链路的上行传输，下行传输也被称为回传链路的下行传输。其中的节点包括但不限于前述IAB节点。
8、空分复用(spatial duplex multiplexing，SDM)：空分复用可以理解为让同一频段在不同的空间内得到重复利用，利用多路空间上的正交信道来同时传输信号达到扩容的目的。简单来说。就是同时从多个方向接收信号，为了提高频谱效率，空分复用场景被广泛应用。
9、时分复用(time division multiplexing，TDM)：时分复用可以理解为采用统一物理连接的不同时段来传输不同的信号，达到多路传输的目的。时分多路复用以时间作为信号分割的参量，故必须使各路信号在时间轴上互不重叠。换句话说，就是将提供给整个信道传输信息的时间划分为若干时隙，将这些时隙分配给每一信号源使用。
10、频分复用(frequency division multiplexing，FDM)：频分复用可以理解为将用于传输信道的总带宽划分为若干个子频带(子信道)，每个子信道传输一路信号，各子信道之间设立保护带进行隔离，使得传输的信号互不干扰，个子信道传输的信号以并行的方式工作。
11、时分资源和频分资源：时分资源是指对于一个DU cell的一个时隙或符号，其所有的频域资源配置相同的资源类型(H/S/NA)。频分资源是指对于一个DU cell的一个时隙或符号，其频域资源被进一步分为多个RB set，或RB set group。其中，对于每一个RB set，或RB set group可以分别配置或指示资源类型(H/S/NA)。
12、资源可用性指示：资源可用性指示可以由宿主基站配置给IAB MT，用于时域动态指示soft资源的可用性。例如，在3GPP Rel-16中，宿主基站通过RRC信令承载AvailabilityCombinationsPerCell信元，对IAB MT的soft时域资源可用性进行配置，其具体实现方式如下：
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000002
其中，AvailabilityCombinationsPerCell用于配置IAB DU cell的soft时域资源可用性指示。availabilityCombinationsPerCell包括DU cell ID，以及DCI信令中比特的起始位置。例如，DCI信令中比特的起始位置为第3个位置，则说明IAB MT接收到的DCI 2_5信令中的第三个比特所指示的Value值是该DU cell的soft时域资源的可用性。
具体的，AvailabilityCombinationsPerCell还包括多个AvailabilityCombination-r16，每个AvailabilityCombination-r16包括一个ID，DCI中指示的是一个或多个该ID。每个availabilityCombinationId-r16对应一个resourceAvailability-r16配置，每个resourceAvailability-r16包括取值0～7的序列，每个取值表示一个soft时隙的资源可用性指示。0～7取值的含义对应3GPP标准协议TS 38.213v16.8.0的表格，具体参见下表4所示的资源可用性指示Value与时隙中soft资源可用性类型指示之间的映射关系。
图4是适用本申请的空分复用场景的一例示意图，如图4所示的IAB系统包括宿主基站，IAB节点1，IAB节点2，UE1和UE2。其中，IAB节点2为IAB节点1的子节点，该IAB节点2可以包括但不限于IAB节点、特殊的终端设备。可选的，特殊的终端设备可以是支持特定NR协议版本的终端设备，例如，支持NR Release 16/17的终端设备。
在IAB场景中，与上级节点通信的链路一般称为回传链路；与用户设备UE通信的链路一般被称为接入链路。也就是说，节点之间的传输可以理解为回传链路，涉及用户设备的传输可以理解为接入链路。图中箭头表示IAB的空分接收场景，即IAB节点1可以同时接收回传链路上宿主基站发送的下行信号，接收子节点IAB节点2发送的上/下行信号，以及接收接入链路上用户设备UE发送的下行信号。应理解，若将图中箭头方向都翻转，则表示IAB的空分发送场景，即IAB节点1可以同时向宿主基站发送上行信号，向子节点IAB节点2发送上/下行信号，以及向用户设备UE2发送下行信号。
示例性的，宿主基站和IAB节点1之间的链路，以及IAB节点1和IAB节点2之间的链路为回传链路。UE1和宿主基站之间的链路以及UE2和IAB节点1之间的链路为接入链路。
需要说明的是，在IAB场景中的频分复用主要指IAB的MT模块和IAB的DU模块之间的频分复用。即IAB MT和IAB DU使用不同频域上的资源。由于MT和DU使用的是频分资源，两者收发信号之间的相互影响会被降低。
应理解，MT模块和DU模块的“同时工作”具体包括：IAB MT和IAB DU的接收与发送，两两组合共4种场景，即MT和DU可以同时接收信号，或者同时发送信号，或者MT接收信号时DU发送信号，或者MT发送信号时DU接收信号，具体场景支持与否依赖于设备的硬件实现。这里“同时工作”是指对于MT模块/DU模块来说，可以同时接收/发送两个方向的信号，并非是在同一时间既接收第一信号，又发送第二信号。
除此之外，在IAB语境中，频分复用还可以包括双连接场景的频分复用。示例性的，IAB节点(MT)将与两个设备同时建立连接，即IAB拥有两个上级节点进行回传。当两个上级节点在频域上使用不同频域资源与IAB通信时，也可以被称为频分复用。
图5是适用本申请的频分复用场景的一例示意图，如图5所示，IAB MT与IAB DU之间进行频分复用，二者通过保护带进行隔离。示例性的，假设频域资源共有200M带宽，MT可以占用100M频域资源与上级节点通信，DU可以占用另外100M频域资源与UE或下级IAB节点通信。
图6是适用本申请的频分复用场景的另一例示意图，如图6所示，IAB MT1与IAB MT2之间进行频分复用，二者通过保护带进行隔离。其中，MT可以同时与多个上级节点连接，即IAB MT在回传链路与两个上级节点频分资源，两个上级节点可以同时调度MT传输。示例性的，假设频域资源共有200M带宽，IAB MT1可以占用100M频域资源与上级节点#1通信，IAB MT2可以占用另外100M频域资源与下级IAB节点#2通信。
需要说明的是，IAB MT模块与IAB DU模块使用的是时分资源，二者在不同的正交频分复用技术(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号上传输资源，可以理解为IAB MT1和IAB MT2在第一时刻传输信号，IAB DU在第二时刻传输信号。
总之，不论是在本申请中频分图案pattern配置的方案中，还是按照上述可能的实现方式中半静态的配置频域资源分段的方案，或者是按照目前技术中涉及的配置多个频域资源块组RBG的方案中，都需要考虑MT与DU之间的保护带(guard band)。对于保护带的大小的约束条件可以通过协议定义，或者是IAB节点向宿主基站上报。具体地，在频分(或频分图案)配置时，对于确定保护带的大小的约束条件，可以从以下方面考虑：
(1)示例性的，保护带与DU或者MT带宽的关系。
例如，当DU cell带宽大于或等于X1RB，或MT CC的带宽大于或等于Y1RB时，那么保护带至少需要Z1RB；再例如，当DU cell带宽大于或等于X2RB，或MT CC的带宽大于或等于Y2RB时，保护带至少需要Z2RB。对于DU cell、MT CC和保护带之间所需要的RB大小，本申请不作具体限定。
需要说明的是，IAB节点上报信令可以采用以下形式：
例如，上报DU cell #1和MT serving cell #1(CC为分量载波，在高层信令配置中体现为服务小区)频分复用时的保护带要求，包括DU的小区标识，MT的服务小区标识，以及至少一个条件。该条件还包括DU的频域带宽配置，MT的频域带宽配置，和至少需要的保护带带宽。其中，频域带宽配置包括以下一种或多种：频域RB数、频域RBG数、频域RB数的范围、频域RBG数的范围、起始频点、结束频点、频域RE数、频域RE数 的范围、子载波间隔等。
例如，信令可以包括但不限于以下的形式：
{DU cell ID:A，
MT cell ID:B，
条件1:X1<DU RB数<X2，Y1<MT RB数<Y2，保护带>＝Z
条件2：……
……
}
(2)示例性的，保护带与传输定时模式之间的关系。
例如，当IAB采用case 6定时模式工作时，需要在频分后的MT或者DU资源上预留X RB的保护带；再例如，当IAB采用case 7定时模式工作时，需要在频分后的MT或者DU资源上预留Y RB的保护带；又例如，当IAB MT接收的同时DU进行发送，或者当IAB MT发送的同时DU进行接收，需要在频分后的MT或者DU资源上预留Z RB的保护带。其中，本申请对X RB、Y RB、Z RB的大小不作具体限定。
需要说明的是，上述定时类型2:case 6可以替换一种在协议里的描述为IAB MT发送的同时，DU进行发送；上述定时类型3:case 7可以替换一种在协议里的描述为IAB MT接收的同时，DU进行接收。
(3)示例性的，保护带与同步状态之间的关系。
例如，当MT与DU的时间对齐时，或者说两者的传输定时偏差小于X1时，需要的保护带为Y1RB。这种情况下，DU和MT之间不会有载波间干扰，二者之间的保护带会比较小，即Y1比较小；再例如，当MT与DU的时间没有完全对齐时，或者说两者的传输定时偏差大于X2时，需要的保护带为Y2RB，相比Y1，Y2可以略大一些。其中X1，X2的单位可以是毫秒，微秒，纳秒，或者Ts(协议中的任意一种时间单位)等。
需要说明的是，IAB向宿主基站上报，可以发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之前，也可以发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后。对于发生在宿主基站向IAB发送频分配置之后的情况，可以理解为宿主基站先配置了一套配置下来，IAB收到后发现保护带不满足要求或不符合其硬件能力，所以才触发了IAB上报这些约束约束条件，宿主基站会基于该约束条件重新进行频分(或频分图案)的配置。
另外，在本申请实施例中，可以通过协议定义频分(或频分图案)的配置约束条件，或者IAB节点向宿主基站上报频分(或频分图案)的配置约束条件，宿主基站再根据该约束条件进行频分(或频分图案)的配置。
示例性的，DU cell频分后的可用资源可以包括以下情况的一种或多种：
(1)包括DU cell的最低频点的RB；
(2)包括DU cell的最高频点的RB；
(3)包括DU cell的最低频点开始的，连续X个RB；
(4)包括DU cell的最高频点往下的，连续X个RB；
(5)DU cell频分后至少有连续的X个RB或RE可用(X为正整数)；
(6)DU cell频分后至少包括初始部分带宽(initial BWP)：
示例性的，初始部分带宽可以是初始上行部分带宽UL BWP；或者，初始部分带宽也 可以是初始下行部分带宽DL BWP；或者，初始部分带宽也可以是DL BWP或UL BWP中较大的一个，或者较小的一个；
(7)DU cell频分后，不能有不连续的频域资源；
(8)DU cell频分后，最多被分成X段连续的频域资源；
示例性的，这里X的取值与DU cell的带宽有关；例如，带宽为100M可以分为2段频域资源；带宽为200M可以分为连续的4段频域资源等。
(9)DU cell频分后至少包括单边带(Single Side Band，SSB)的带宽；
(10)DU cell频分后至少包括物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel，PRACH)资源的带宽；
(11)DU cell频分后至少包括公共上行控制物理信道(common physical uplink control channel，common PUCCH)资源所占用的带宽；
(12)DU cell频分后至少包括控制资源集合(control resource set#0，CORESET 0)#0的带宽；
(13)DU cell频分后至少包括系统消息块1(system information block #1，SIB 1)所占用的带宽。
应理解，上述情况仅是示例性说明，不应该对本申请的方案构成任何限定。
随着移动通信技术的不断发展，频谱资源日趋紧张。为了提高频谱利用率，未来的基站部署将会更加密集。此外，密集部署还可以避免覆盖空洞的出现。在传统蜂窝网络架构下，基站通过光纤与核心网建立连接。然而在很多场景下，光纤的部署成本非常高昂。无线中继节点RN通过无线回传链路与核心网建立连接，可以节省部分光纤部署成本。
一般情况下，中继节点与一个或多个上级节点建立无线回传链路，并通过上级节点接入核心网。上级节点可以通过多种信令对中继节点进行一定的控制(例如，数据调度、定时调制、功率控制等)。同时，中继节点也可以为多个下级节点提供服务。中继节点的上级节点可以是基站，也可以是另一个中继节点；中继节点的下级节点可以是UE，也可以是另一个中继节点。在某些情形下，上级节点也可以称为上游节点，下级节点也可以称为下游节点。
带内中继是回传链路与接入链路共享相同频段的中继方案，由于没有使用额外的频谱资源，带内中继具有频谱效率高及部署成本低等优点。带内中继一般具有半双工的约束，具体地，中继节点在接收其上级节点发送的下行信号时，不能向其下级节点发送下行信号，而中继节点在接收其下级节点发送的上行信号时，不能向其上级节点发送上行信号。NR的带内中继方案被称为接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul，IAB)，而中继节点被称为IAB节点。
在IAB节点正常工作时，接入链路与回传链路以时分，空分或频分的方式进行资源复用。示例性的，以时分复用TDM场景为例，回传链路与接入链路在不同的时刻工作，因此IAB节点需要在回传链路的收发与接入链路的收发之间切换。当回传与接入链路无间隔切换时，即接入链路符号与回传链路符号连续时，IAB节点具有最高的资源利用率。然而，由于功放的开关时间、传输距离、非理想同步等各种因素，回传链路与接入链路不能实现无间隔切换。此时，IAB节点需要确定回传链路和接入链路中可用和/或不可用符号的集合。
下面首先将协议中与本申请实施例相关的技术方案进行说明。
图7是当前协议Re-16支持的DU时域资源配置下的资源利用的一例示意图，如图7所示，横纵坐标分别表示时间和频率，即时域资源和频域资源。对于整个小区，也就是小区全局标识(cell global ID，CGI)1，分别配置时域H、S、S、NA资源。
需要说明的是，时域的hard(H)资源为DU一定可用的资源，MT一般不会使用该时域资源进行通信；时域的not available(NA)资源为DU不可用的资源，MT可以使用该时域资源进行通信；时域的soft(S)资源为DU是否可用主要依赖于上级节点的进一步指示。
示例性的，横坐标可以看作是该小区四个不同的时域资源的配置情况，即DU cell的第一时域资源是一定可用的，第二、三时域资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的指示，第四时隙资源是不可用的。应理解，MT只有上行/下行传输方向的配置，没有配置H/S/NA资源。因为上级节点知道下级节点的资源配置情况，所以为了避免MT与DU冲突，上级节点就不在第一时域资源对MT进行调度，上级节点DU向下级节点发送下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)信令，来进一步指示DU在第二、三时域资源是否可用，针对第四时域资源，MT可以根据传输需求选择调度或者不调度。
图8是当前协议Rel-17支持的DU时域资源配置下的资源利用的另一例示意图，如图8所示，横纵坐标分别表示时间和频率，即时域资源和频域资源。该方案是先在频域上把原来的整个小区带宽分为多份，带宽大小可以不同，也就是将频域资源分割(例如，资源块组1和资源块组2)，细化成频域资源块组RBG的粒度；再在每份更小的频域粒度上分别配置时域H/S/NA。
示例性的，横坐标可以看作是该小区四个不同的时隙资源的配置情况，对于资源块组1来说，第一时域资源是一定可用的，第二、三时域资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的指示，第四时域资源是不可用的；对于资源块组2来说，第一、二时域资源是一定可用的，第三时域资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的指示，第四时域资源是不可用的。
需要说明的是，该方案只需要对时域S资源进行指示，频域S资源转化/等效为时域在RBG上的S资源，可以不需要再定义与指示该频域S资源，也就是说可以重用当前针对时域S资源的物理层DCI信令，对DU频域S资源是否可用进行指示。
应理解，上述图7所示的时域资源配置方案针对的是DU的某一小区，而该实现方式则是针对DU的某一小区上的某一段频域资源，即将原来DU小区的资源类型进一步细化为RBG的粒度。另外，该实现方式并不是真正意义上的动态频分，没有“动态”的频域资源，频域上的部分资源是否可用不是依赖于物理层的信令指示，而是基于原有动态时分的框架，在半静态的频域资源划分的基础上实现的动态频分，物理层信令仅指示时域资源是否可用。换句话说，半静态的频域资源划分是指整个小区的频域资源是已经固定的，并不能真正意义上的指示下级节点某一时隙的某一部分频域资源是否可用，而是指示下级节点某一频域资源块组在某一时隙上是否可用。
图9是当前协议Rel-17支持的DU时域资源配置下的资源利用的又一例示意图，如图9所示，横纵坐标分别表示时间和频率，即时域资源和频域资源。先配置时域资源H/S/NA，对应上述图7所示的方案，在此基础上，再在频域上配置H/S/NA，例如将频域资源分割(例如，资源块组1、资源块组2和资源块组3)，细化成资源块组RBG的粒度；再在每 份更小的频域粒度上分别配置频域H/S/NA。所以频域资源H/S/NA可能会覆盖时域资源H/S/NA。
示例性的，横坐标可以看作是该小区四个不同的时隙资源的配置情况，通过时域和频域资源H/S/NA配置后，对于资源块组1来说，第一时域资源H被频域资源NA覆盖，由时域资源一定可用变成频域资源不可用；第二时域资源S被频域资源H覆盖，由时域资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的指示变成频域一定可用；对于资源块组2来说，第三时域资源S被频域资源NA覆盖，由时域资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的指示变成频域不可用等。
需要说明的是，上述图8所示的频域资源配置方案没有频域S资源，频域上的部分资源是否可用不依赖于物理层的信令指示，而图9所示的实现方式需要定义并指示DU频域的H/S/NA资源，因此频域资源配置可以覆盖时域配置。
应理解，图8和图9所述的方案都是将原来DU小区的资源类型进一步细化为RBG的粒度，针对DU的cell上的某一段频域资源，即隐式默认配置频分复用，每一时隙都要分别配置多次H/S/NA。虽然可以通过将同一时隙或符号上的多个资源块组RBG配置为NA/H来实现时分，但是若系统大部分时候不需要进行空分复用或频分复用，上述配置方案针对每一个RBG进行H/S/NA配置，则显得冗余复杂；对于不频分的S资源，则需要进一步信令指示，使得DCI信令开销大。另外，在实际应用中，频分配置与指示不需要过于灵活，频分资源是否支持情况与设备硬件实现等方面有关，过于灵活的频分配置和动态指示S资源是否可用将增加不必要的开销。
综上所述，若系统大部分时候不进行资源时分复用或频分复用，如何降低信令开销，特别是配置开销和动态指示S资源的开销是亟待解决的问题。而且，不同于时域资源固定按时隙划分，频域资源的划分相对比较灵活，如何避免频域资源由于过于灵活的配置，造成配置复杂冗余、开销过大的问题也是亟待解决的问题。
应理解，如果频分复用的资源配置过于灵活，可能会导致以下几方面潜在的问题：
首先，可变带宽可能会导致UE对周期性参考信号测量困难，例如，追踪参考信号(tracking refernece signal，TRS)。TRS可以用于时间和频率偏移跟踪，可以以周期性或非周期性方式传输。当以非周期性方式传输TRS时，可以识别其准共位(quasico-location，QCL)信息。
需要说明的是，TRS一般通过大带宽传输，UE测量TRS作为数据解调的QCL Type-A参考源；其中，QCL-TypeA的配置为:{多普勒偏移、多普勒扩展、平均延迟、延迟扩展}；另外，MT与DU频分，导致DU小区带宽发生变化，周期性TRS带宽也发生变化，将对UE造成影响，因为UE的TRS资源是半静态配置的，一般需要大带宽；同样地，还需要考虑对单边带SSB等信号的影响，因为SSB作为小区级信号，必须保证DU cell可以在相应带宽资源上发送该SSB。
其次，可变带宽导致DU对接收UE发送的上行信道探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)，物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)等信号造成影响。
需要说明的是，UE发送PUCCH和SRS往往需要跳频，用于提升UE发送功率，并利用信道多样性来改善其上行覆盖性能；另外，SRS和PUCCH发送的跳频和频域资源均为半静态配置，即CU通过RRC信令为UE配置；而且，频分可能导致DU在UE发送 SRS和PUCCH的资源上无法进行接收信号；如果一开始就给UE按照DU在频分后(窄带的)的频域资源配置PUCCH和SRS，那么会明显影响UE的上行覆盖性能。
总而言之，需要对频分复用的资源分配进行约束，当频分不太灵活时，网络(IAB和宿主基站)至少可以按照频分和不频分这两种方式对DU cell的可用带宽进行处理，半静态地为UE配置适配的几种带宽下的CORESET，PUCCH，TRS，SRS等信号与信道资源，例如，两三种比较少的带宽，避免由于信令开销太大，且UE不支持保存太多的资源配置而影响正常的通信，降低系统性能。
基于此，本申请提供了一种IAB资源频分与指示的方法，基于预定义的频分资源图案pattern，配置部分非TDM时隙上的频域资源的具体分配；并且基于新设计的动态信令，指示每个非TDM时隙上部分或全部资源是否可用。该方案能够实现在部分或全部时域资源上配置与指示预定义和配置的频分资源。通过预配置频域图案pattern，避免了每个FDM时隙上去差异化的配置与指示DU可用的频域资源RBG，而且降低了资源配置的复杂度以及信令的开销。
下面结合附图对本申请实施例中无线通信方法进行详细说明。
图10是适用本申请实施例的IAB资源频分与指示方法的一例示意图，具体实现步骤1000包括：
S1010，网络设备(例如，宿主基站)向第一节点(例如，第一IAB节点)和/或终端设备(例如，UE)发送第一信息；对应的，第一节点接收来自网络设备的第一信息。
其中，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同。
一种可能的实现方式，针对第三资源的可用性，当该第一网络设备不发送该第一指示信息时，默认DU cell不可用该第三资源。
示例性的，该第一资源、第二资源、第三资源是否可用可以是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元的部分带宽BWP进行配置的，或者是针对第一节点的分布式单元DU的部分频域资源，例如频域资源块组RBG进行配置的，该第一网络设备是第一节点的的上级节点，该第二网络设备是第一节点的下级节点。
应理解，该多个图案可以是网络设备配置的，或者该多个图案可以是协议预定义的，本申请对此不作限定。
示例性的，该多个图案是宿主(donor)网络设备配置的，即接收宿主网络设备发送的一个或多个图案的配置信息。其中，该一个或多个图案的配置信息可以是宿主网络设备经过一次或多次进行配置的，本申请对此不作具体限定。
一种可能的实现方式，在宿主网络设备配置该多个图案之前，宿主网络设备接收来自第一节点发送的频分复用配置信息，该频分复用配置信息包括该多个图案配置的限制条件。
示例性的，协议定义的频域资源的图案可以指示多段频域资源的属性为H/S/NA，和/或协议定义多种长度的频域资源的图案。
作为示例而非限定，网络设备确定多个频域图案pattern，该第一资源可以为频域H资源(hard)，说明DU cell一定可用的频域资源；第二资源可以为频域NA资源(not available)，说明DU cell不可用的资源，说明是移动终端(mobile-termination，MT)可用的资源；第三资源可以为频域S资源(soft)，说明DU cell是否可用该资源需要根据上级节点发送的指示信息确定。换句话说，每个图案指示的至少一种资源的频域资源属性(attribute)包括以下至少一种：H、S、NA。
在本申请实施例中，S资源是否可用在被进一步指示后，可以被确定为“可用”或“不可用”，或者可以被确定为“可用”或“不指示可用”。其中，是否可用的指示可以针对上行、下行、灵活三种TDD传输方向配置中的一种或多种进行配置。例如，通过信令指示S的上行资源指示可用，下行和灵活资源不指示可用等。
示例性的，当该至少一种资源是第一资源时，第一节点可以与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信；当该至少一种资源是第二资源时，第一节点不可以与终端设备进行通信，第一节点可以与第一网络设备进行通信；该至少一种资源是第三资源时，第一节点需要根据第一网络设备的指示确定第三资源是否可用于与终端设备和/或下级中继节点进行通信。
一种可能的实现方式，该每个图案的配置包括：至少一种资源的频域资源带宽，其中，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，而且任意两个图案标识信息不同。
一种可能的实现方式，该每个图案的配置还包括至少一种资源的频域资源属性，该每一频域资源属性为该第一资源、该第二资源、该第三资源中的一种。
应理解，协议定义频域资源的图案可以指示多段频域资源的属性为H/S/NA，和/或协议定义多种长度的频域资源的图案。
示例性的，当第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell的频域资源被分为三段，即三个频域资源集合，每个集合包括连续的频域资源，则可以选择对应的频域资源分为三段的图案进行映射。
需要说明的是，对于频域资源划分的粒度与方式，可以是RBG，还可以是RB数，又可以是部分带宽BWP等，本申请不作具体限定。
可选地，当协议只定义了一种长度的频域资源图案，例如频域分为五段的图案，那么只需要映射每个图案中的前三个资源属性的资源，即每个图案的前三个资源属性对应每一段资源的可用性。
一种可能的实现方式，该频域资源带宽的配置包括：至少一种资源的起始资源块编号和至少一种资源的资源块数目。
示例性的，该频域资源带宽可以是网络设备配置的，或该频域资源带宽可以是协议预定义的，例如，DU可以基于cell实际使用的带宽，计算出实际指示的频域带宽。本申请对此不作限定。
例如，当第一节点的分布式单元DU的小区cell的频域资源被分为三段，即三个频域资源集合，每个集合包括连续的频域资源，则可以选择对应的频域资源分为三段的图案进行映射。
一种可能的实现方式，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，通过图案的标识可以确定对应的频域资源图案中每段资源的频域大小、以及每段资源对应的频域属性。
例如，当协议只定义了一种长度的频域资源图案，例如频域分为五段的图案，那么只 需要映射每个图案中的前三个资源属性的资源，即每个图案的前三个资源属性对应每一段资源的可用性。
再例如，每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，通过图案的标识可以确定对应的频域资源图案中每段资源的频域大小、以及每段资源对应的频域属性。
又例如，基于频域资源起始与长度指示配置SLIV，通过协议预定义定义频域带宽资源的起始和持续长度，映射调度的频域资源的起始和结束频域资源的索引。即网络设备通过索引值可以确定对应的频域资源的起始资源块编号以及资源块的数目，从而配置频域H//S/NA的频域长度。
一种可能的实现方式，该第一信息包括至少一个图案集合的标识信息，该至少一个图案集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标图案集合，该至少一个目标图案集合包括该第一图案，其中，每个图案集合的配置包括该多个图案中的至少一个图案，该每个图案集合具有对应的图案集合标识信息，任意两个图案集合的标识信息不同。
其中，该第一信息用于指示该多个图案中的第一图案；应理解，该第一信息可以仅指示一个或多个图案，也可以指示一个或多个图案集合，本申请对此不作限定。
一种可能的实现方式，网络设备向第一节点和/或终端设备发送第三信息；对应的，第一节点和/或终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三信息。该第三信息用于配置至少一个第一时隙；在该至少一个第一时隙上映射至少一个第一图案。
示例性的，该第一时隙是第一时域周期内的时隙，或者该第一时隙是第一时域周期内时域资源为第四资源所对应的时隙，其中，该第一时域周期与该第一时域资源配置的周期对应，该第四资源是否可用由第二指示信息确定，该第二指示信息是该第一网络设备发送的。
可选地，该第一时隙还可以包括第一时域周期内的所有时隙。
应理解，这里第一时隙可以是非TDM时隙，或者直接称为FDM时隙，本申请对第一时隙的具体名称不作限定，该第一时隙仅仅是支持一种功能，即允许为部分时隙配置频分的资源配置。另外，本申请对支持该功能的第一时隙的数量也不作限定。
需要说明的是，第一时隙只是时间粒度的一种实现方式，在第一时段也可以确定第一符号等，本申请对具体的时间粒度不作限定。
示例性的，该第一周期可以与第一时段的时域资源H/S/NA配置的周期对应，或者可以单独配置一个周期，单位为时隙数，或绝对时间，又或者可以以一个系统帧为一个周期，本申请对该第一周期的确定方式不作限定。
一种可能的实现方式，根据子载波间隔确定该第一时段和/或该第一周期内的总时隙数；并根据该第一时隙的编号和/或该第一时隙的编号集合确定与该第一时隙对应的时隙数。
例如，DU根据时域资源H/S/NA配置周期，和该配置的子载波间隔，计算出该第一周期内的时隙数，在根据第一时隙的编号确定具体哪些时隙为非TDM时隙。
再例如，以DU的小区cell的初始部分带宽BWP的子载波间隔为参考，确定周期内的总时隙数。由于在一个给定的子载波间隔下，一个系统帧的总时隙数是固定的。
可选地，参考的子载波间隔可以是单独配置的，或者是参考其他当前协议在其他信令或其他应用场景中，已存在的子载波间隔的配置，本申请对此不作限定。
作为示例而非限定，在第一时隙上映射多个图案中的至少一个图案，也就是说，基于确定的多种频域图案，为第一时隙配置频域图案。
可选地，可以通过频域图案的编号进一步指示，或者是频域图案的标识信息。
其中，在映射频域资源H/S/NA时，频域图案的数目与第一时隙的数目之间不作限定。示例性的，该至少一个图案的数目与该第一时隙的数目相同；或者该至少一个图案的数目是该第一时隙的数目的正整数倍，此时频域图案的循环周期就是映射周期的正整数倍；或者该至少一个图案的数目小于该第一时隙的数目，此时未被配置频域图案的第一时隙就默认不进行频分，例如该第一时隙默认回退为TDM时隙。
可选地，在映射频域资源H/S/NA时，可以将不同的频域资源图案映射到该第一时隙上。例如，将频域H资源映射到第一时隙上，或者在该资源配置的基础上，再将频域资源NA映射到该第一时隙上，此时频域NA资源覆盖了频域H资源，即第一节点的DU在该第一时隙上的频域资源可用性从一定可用资源变成不可用资源。即在时域资源上映射频域资源中，可以将频域H/S/NA资源任意组合后映射到第一时隙。本申请对此不作限定，具体以网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备之间的通信需求为准。
可选地，在映射频域资源H/S/NA时，可以在第一时隙映射频域资源H/S/NA中的任一资源；或者S+NA，即在第一时隙先映射S资源，再在该S资源上映射频域资源NA；或者S+H、H+NA、S+H+NA等，本申请对资源的映射方式不作限定。
可选地，在映射频域资源H/S/NA时，可以将同一频域资源，例如，频域H资源分别映射到不同的时域资源上，例如时域S、NA资源等，本申请对此不作限定。
一种可能的实现方式，网络设备向第一节点和/或终端设备发送第四信息；对应的，第一节点和/或终端设备接收来自网络设备的第四消息。其中，该第四信息用于指示第三资源的资源可用性；可选地，该第四信息还用于指示第四资源的资源可用性，即时域资源属性为S的资源。
换句话说，该第四信息可以用来指示时域S资源和频域S资源的资源可用性，和/或该第四信息可以用来指示第一时隙上频域S资源的资源可用性。
一种可能的实现方式，网络设备向第一节点和/或终端设备发送第五信息，该第五信息用于指示第一时隙对应的频域资源的分组信息；并发送第六信息，该第六消息用于指示至少一个频域资源组的资源属性。
示例性的，通过高层信令(例如，RRC或者F1-AP信令)，对DU cell的频域资源进行分组。
需要说明的是，对于频域资源划分的粒度与方式，可以是RBG，还可以是RB数，又可以是部分带宽BWP等，本申请不作具体限定。
示例性的，通过发送物理层DCI信令，显隐式指示该至少一个频域资源组的资源可用性。例如，DCI信令通过0/1比特进行指示IAB DU的至少一个资源组的资源可用性。其中，0表示该频域资源组的资源不可用，或者表示该频域资源组的资源不指示可用，1表示该资源组的频域资源可用。或者，通过有无比特来隐式指示该至少一个资源组的资源可用性。例如，当与频域资源组对应的比特数值为1，表示该频域资源组的资源是可用的；反之，如果没有比特数值，则表示对应的频域资源组的资源不可用。如果本申请对此不作限定。
一种可能的实现方式，获取第一关系和/或第二关系，该第一关系表示第一参数和第一资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第一关系用于指示第一时隙的资源可用性，即soft时隙的上行、下行、灵活资源的可用性；该第二关系用于表示第二参数和第二资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，该第二关系用于指示第一时隙的频域资源的资源可用性，即soft时隙的上行、下行、灵活资源的H/S/NA的资源可用性；根据该第一关系和/或该第二关系确定第一图案。
应理解，该第一关系和该第二关系可以指示所有时域资源的可用性以及所有频域资源的可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙，也就是需要频分复用的时隙的资源可用性，和/或可以指示第一时隙的频域资源的可用性等，本申请对此不作限定。
一种可能的实现方式，网络设备向第一节点和/或终端设备发送第七信息，该第七信息包括至少一个指示集合的标识信息，该至少一个指示集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标指示集合，该至少一个目标指示集合包括第一参数和/或第二参数，其中，任意两个指示集合的标识信息不同；根据该至少一个目标指示集合确定至少一个时隙的一个或多个频域资源的资源属性。
进一步地，根据该至少一个目标指示集合确定第三资源和/或第四资源的资源可用性。
S1020，根据该第一图案，网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信。
其中，该第一节点为中继节点，应理解，本申请实施例适用于具有中继节点的无线通信系统。其中，该中继节点可以是IAB节点，或者还可以是终端设备，即具有无线中继功能的终端设备。特别地，在NR中，中继节点一般是IAB节点。
示例性的，在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案，网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信。
应理解，这里第一时域资源可以理解为时间资源集合，该第一时域资源可以包括一个或多个时隙，该多个时隙可以是连续的时隙，或者是不连续的时隙。将该一个或多个时隙上映射第一图案，用于第一节点和第二网络设备和/或终端设备之间的通信。
可选地，在该第一时域资源的一个或多个时隙上可以映射不同的频域资源图案。
可选地，第一时域资源也可以包括一个或多个符号，对于时间粒度本申请不做限定。
示例性的，网络设备向第一节点和/或终端设备发送第二信息；对应的，第一节点和/或终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二信息。其中，第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源。
需要说明的是，本申请所涉及的指示信息、配置信息等承载方式可以是但不限于：无线资源控制信令、媒体接入控制MAC层信令和物理层PHY信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制RRC信令；MAC层信令包括：MAC控制元素CE；物理层信令包括：下行控制信息DCI等。
根据本申请实施例的方案，提供了一种无线通信方法和装置，通过预定义和配置频分资源的图案，映射到需要进行频分复用的时域资源上，并进一步地通过信令指示每个频分时隙上部分或全部资源的可用性，能够实现对中继节点的资源配置。通过对频分复用的资源分配进行约束，即频分配置不过于灵活，使得网络(例如，宿主基站和IAB节点)至少可以按照频分和不频分两种方式对DU cell的可用带宽进行处理，半静态地为UE配置适配的几种带宽下的信号与信道资源等，进而降低信令开销，更有利于提升系统性能。
图11是适用本申请的IAB资源频分与指示方法的另一例示意图，主要是在部分时隙 上配置频域的H/S/NA，频域的H/S/NA是基于若干图案(pattern)进行配置的。如图11所示，实现步骤1100包括：
S1110，宿主基站(即，网络设备的一例)确定时域H/S/NA资源配置，并向第一IAB节点(即，第一节点的一例)的DU的每个cell发送时域H/S/NA资源配置；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的时域H/S/NA资源配置。
示例性的，宿主基站的CU向DU发送信令，例如，高层信令RRC，用于指示小区时域资源的配置。具体的信令格式可以参照标准3GPP协议TS 38.473规定，此处不再赘述。因此，DU的每个小区会被配置时域的H资源，S资源(即，第四资源的一例)，以及NA资源。第一节点的DU根据资源配置与下级节点(例如，终端设备)进行通信，例如，小区1的时域资源依次被配置为H、S、S、NA等。对应地，可以理解为DU的小区1的第一时域资源一定可用，第二、三时域资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示，第四时域资源不可用，即第一IAB节点的DU在第四时域资源不能与下级节点和/或终端设备进行通信。
S1120，宿主基站确定至少一种频域资源H/S/NA的图案pattern。
在一种可能的实现方式中，基站配置或协议预定义一种或多种频域H/S/NA图案pattern。应理解，这里“一种”主要是允许通过信令新增一个配置，或修改其中一个配置，因此存在仅包含一种pattern的情况。
在本申请实施例中，频域资源包括可用资源(H)、非可用资源(NA)和待调度资源(S)，(即，第一资源、第二资源、第三资源的一例)这里待调度资源表示资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示。需要说明的是，在不强调其区别时，二者所要表达的含义是一致的。
图12示出了频域H/S/NA图案pattern配置的一例示意图，如图12所示，包括N种频域pattern，频域pattern 1可以看作是将一小区的频域资源划分为三段，依次表示频域资源不可用NA、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示S、一定可用H；频域pattern 2可以看作是将一小区的频域资源划分为四段，依次表示频域资源一定可用H、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示S、一定可用H、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示S；频域pattern N可以看作是将一小区的频域资源划分为两段，依次表示频域资源一定可用H、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示S等。
作为示例而非限定，定义多段频域资源的属性为hard(H)，soft(S)或者not available(NA)，具体每一段频域资源所指示的带宽，依赖于宿主基站的CU对DU的进一步配置。该配置针对的是DU的某一具体小区cell，即将一个小区的频域资源进一步细分。
示例性的，假设协议定义的频域资源的图案pattern可以指示5段资源的属性为H/S/NA，那么协议可以定义多种pattern组合，并为每一种进行编号标识。表1示出多种pattern组合，如表1所示，编号0代表的pattern图案H、H、S、NA、NA，说明该小区的频域资源被分成5段，依次是频域资源一定可用、一定可用、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示、不可用、不可用；或者，pattern可以指示5段资源的属性为H/NA，那么协议可以定义多种pattern组合，例如H、H、NA、NA、H，或者NA、H、H、H、H，或者H、H、H、H、H等。应理解，表1仅是示例性说明，实际可能有很多图案形式，在此不一一列举，不应对本申请方案构成任何限定。
可选地，协议可以定义多种长度的pattern。例如，频域资源可以进一步划分为6段、7段等不同长度的频域资源。
表1
编号 图案pattern
0 H、H、S、NA、NA
1 NA、S、H、S、H
2 S、S、S、H、NA
3 H、H、H、H、H
4 NA、NA、NA、NA、NA
...... ......
图13示出了小区频域分段的H/S/NA图案配置的一例示意图。如图13所示，将DU的小区cell分为三段，分别为X个资源块RB，Y个资源块RB和Z个资源块RB。示例性的，RB的配置可以从小区的最低频点开始计数的第一个RB开始，依次排列；也可以存在额外的配置信息，用于配置RB的起始位置物理资源块(physical resource block，PRB)编号。
也就是说，这三个RBG的配置可以是：RBG1为从DU cell起始频点开始计算的连续X个RB，RBG2为从RBG1最后一个RB后的第一个RB开始计算的连续Y个RB，RBG3为从RBG2最后一个RB后的第一个RB开始计算的连续Z个RB，本申请对每个资源块组的频域资源的大小不作限定。
那么针对图12所示的频域分段情况，可以选择对应频域分为三段的pattern。如果协议只定义了一种长度的频域pattern，则取每个pattern的前几个。示例性的，表1定义了5段频域pattern，如果DU的小区频域资源被划分为三段，则每个pattern的前三个资源属性对应每一段资源的可用性。
示例性的，在某一FDM时隙上指示采用表1中编号为1的pattern(NA、S、H、S、H)，对应图12所示的频域分段情况，那么编号1中的前三个频域pattern的属性分别对应于该小区的前三段资源的可用性。最终得到的配置为：前X个RB为NA资源(DU不可用)，接下来的Y个RB为S资源(DU是否可用依赖上级节点的进一步指示)，最后Z个RB为H资源(DU一定可用)。
作为示例而非限定，定义多段频域资源的属性为hard(H)，soft(S)或者not available(NA)，具体每一段频域资源所指示的带宽由协议规定为一个参考值，IAB DU基于小区实际使用的带宽，计算出实际指示的带宽。
示例性的，协议规定的参考值以频域资源比例的形式确定，例如，规定pattren为H：S:NA＝2:1:0，对应具有100Mhz的DU cell，则在该时隙上确定了100Mhz×2/(2+1)＝66.7Mhz的hard资源，100Mhz×1/(2+1)＝33.3Mhz的soft资源。再例如，规定pattren为NA：H＝1:1，对应具有100Mhz的DU cell，则在该时隙上确定了100Mhz×1/2＝50Mhz的NA资源，100Mhz×1/2＝50Mhz的soft资源。或者，在一种可能的实现方式中，将上述100Mhz带宽替换为资源块RB数进行计算等。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，宿主基站配置频域资源H/S/NA的图案pattern。
需要说明的是，宿主基站可以实现任意形式的频域资源pattern配置，每个pattern可以用一个ID进行标识。Pattern配置包括每段资源的频域大小(即RB长度)，以及每段 资源的属性。
示例性的，非TDM时隙的频域pattern配置如下所示，需要说明的是，协议中也可能用包含相同内容的其他方式进行实现。
FDMPatternConfiguration：{
Pattern ID
RBG1{
StartRB number；
Length:Number of RB；
attribute enumerate(hard，soft，not available)；
}
RBG2{
StartRB number；
Length:Number of RB；
attribute enumerate(hard，soft，not available)
}
…
RBG N{
StartRB number；
Length:Number of RB；
attribute enumerate(hard，soft，not available)
}
}
下面表2示出的是每段频域资源的pattern配置信息，如表2所示，pattern ID为RBG1的频域pattern被分为四段，起始的RB编号为0，RB数分别为1、2、3、4，对应的频域属性分别为H、H、S、NA；pattern ID为RBG 2的频域pattern被分为三段，起始的RB编号为1，RB数分别为1、2、3，对应的频域属性分别为NA、H、S等。应理解，表2仅是示例性说明，不应对本申请构成任何限定。
表2
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000003
在又一种可能的实现方式中，基站基于频域资源起始与长度指示配置(start and length indicator value，SLIV)对频域pattern进行配置。
示例性的，SLIV通过协议预定义表格，映射调度的时域资源的起始和结束时隙/符号的索引。同样地，在该实现方式中，通过定义频域带宽资源的起始和持续长度对频域pattern进行配置。需要说明的是，当一个资源类型，例如hard(H)存在两个SLIV值时，就是有两段。
表3示出的是频域资源的pattern配置信息，如表3所示，列举了部分索引以及其指示的带宽的组合。示例性的，索引1表示频域pattern为hard(H，频域资源一定可用)的资源长度为2，即包括2个资源块，资源起始的资源块编号为0；索引13表示频域pattern为soft(S，频域资源是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示)的资源长度为6，即包括6个资源块，资源起始的资源块编号为1；索引18表示频域pattern为not available(NA，频域资源不可用)的资源长度为1，即仅有1个资源块，资源起始的资源块编号为2等。应理解，表3中的数值仅是示例，实际可能有很多种表格的定义形式，在此不一一列举，实际中并不限定其长度，起始编号以及对应索引的取值与取值范围，不应对本申请方案构成任何限定。
表3
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000004
作为示例而非限定，当定义或者配置表3所示的资源起始、长度以及索引时，基站就能基于该索引配置资源起始和频域资源H/S/NA的长度，例如：
Hard：SLIV index X1，SLIV index X2，……
Soft：SLIV index Y1，SLIV index Y2，……
NA：SLIV index Z1，……
总之，通过这样的配置形式，基站就能实现任意长度的，连续或不连续的频域H/S/NA资源的配置。
可选地，宿主基站确定多个图案集合，每个图案集合的配置包括该多个图案中的至少 一个图案，其中，该每个图案集合具有对应的图案集合标识信息，任意两个图案集合标识信息不同；
S1130，宿主基站向第一IAB节点的DU的每个cell发送第一配置信息(即，第三信息的一例)，该第一配置信息用于指示非TDM时隙(即，第一时隙的一例)的资源配置；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的非TDM时隙的资源配置信息。
其中，非TDM时隙(或称为FDM时隙)仅仅是支持一个功能，该功能可以为部分时隙配置频分资源配置。应理解，只要支持该功能的时隙均在保护范围内，本申请对该时隙的名称不作具体限定。
一种可能的实现方式，在时域上，配置部分时隙为非TDM时隙。其中，对于TDM时隙，上述步骤S1110配置的时域H/S/NA资源仍然适用；对于非TDM时隙，则需要进一步根据频域资源H/S/NA pattern，确定其中每一段频域资源是否可用。
另一种可能的实现方式，可以配置在一个时域周期内的部分时隙，为非TDM时隙。
作为示例而非限定，可以与时域H/S/NA配置的周期绑定，即在该周期的内某些时隙为非TDM时隙。具体的，配置非TDM时隙的时隙编号，DU根据H/S/NA配置周期，和该配置的子载波间隔，计算出周期内的时隙数，在根据编号确定具体哪些时隙为非TDM时隙。
作为示例而非限定，单独配置一个周期，单位为时隙数，或绝对时间(例如秒，或毫秒)，例如可以称之为频分复用传输周期(FDM transmission periodicity)或者非时分复用传输周期(non-TDM transmission periodicity)。
作为示例而非限定，以一个系统帧(10ms)为一个周期，配置直接指示其中部分时隙为非TDM时隙。由于在一个给定的子载波间隔下，系统帧内的总时隙数是固定的。因此，可以以DU的小区cell的初始部分带宽(bandwidth part，BWP)的子载波间隔作为参考，确定周期内的总时隙数。示例性的，在60kHz子载波间隔内，确定的系统帧内总时隙数为40个；在120kHz子载波间隔内，确定的系统帧总时隙数为80个等。此时，可以仅配置非TDM时隙的编号集合，例如集合{5，9，25，29}表示第5、9、25、29时隙为非TDM时隙。
可选地，参考的子载波间隔单独配置；或者参考其他当前协议在其他信令或其他应用场景中，已经存在的子载波间隔的配置，本申请对此不作限定。
又一种可能的实现方式，默认所有时域S(是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示)时隙都是潜在的非TDM时隙。
S1140，在非TDM时隙上映射频域资源H/S/NA图案pattern(即，第一图案)。
可选地，宿主基站向第一IAB节点DU发送指示信息(即，第一信息的一例)，该指示信息包括第一图案的指示信息，用于指示在该非TDM时隙上映射该第一图案；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的指示信息。
示例性的，宿主基站向第一IAB节点发送F1-AP信令(即，第一信息的一例)；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的F1-AP信令。其中，该F1-AP信令用于指示对应一个时隙上应用多个图案中的第一图案。
在一种可能实现方式中，F1-AP信令可以一次性配置很多个时隙(非TDM时隙)的频域资源H/S/NA图案pattern，例如使用一条信令，配置一个配置周期内所有非TDM时 隙的频域资源H/S/NA图案pattern。
可选地，第一IAB节点接收DCI信令，该第三信息包括至少一个图案集合标识信息，该至少一个图案集合标识信息用于指示至少一个目标图案集合。
也就是说，基于步骤S1120中配置的多种频域pattern，宿主基站为第一IAB节点的DU的每个小区在周期内的每一个非TDM时隙(或统称为部分时隙)，分别映射某一个频域pattern。进一步的，可以通过pattern编号进行指示(例如，pattern 1和pattern 2)。
在一种可能的实现方式中，宿主基站为一个周期的所有非TDM时隙都配置一个频域pattern。具体周期的确定的该方法步骤S1130已经说明，此处不再赘述。例如，一个配置周期内有4个非TDM时隙，则宿主基站可以配置4个pattern的编号。这四个编号所对应的频域pattern会被依次对应到周期内的4个非TDM时隙上。按照这个规则，在多个周期往复循环。
图14示出了在周期性的部分时隙映射频域H/S/NA图案的一例示意图。如图14所示，横纵坐标分别表示时间和频率，即时域资源和频域资源。对于整个小区，也就是小区全局标识(cell global ID，CGI)1，分别配置时域H、S、S、NA资源。
在DU的小区cell上，一个配置周期内默认有3个S资源为非TDM时隙，其中第一、二个非TDM时隙配置为频域pattern 1，可以看作是将频域资源细分为三段，对应的资源属性依次为NA、S、H；第3个非TDM时隙配置为频域pattern 2，可以看作是将频域资源细分为四段，对应的资源属性依次为H、S、H、NA。
可选地，宿主基站可以配置三个不同的pattern编号，例如pattern 1、pattern 2和pattern 3，则该3个非TDM时隙依次配置频域pattern 1、pattern 2和pattern 3等。需要说明的是，周期内配置的非TDM时隙映射的频域pattern可以相同，也可以不同，本申请对此不作限定。
应理解，对于配置非TDM的时隙，可以理解为将频域资源进一步细分为RBG粒度，针对的是每一段频域资源；对于未配置非TDM的时隙，则是针对DU的某个小区cell。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，允许宿主基站配置更多的pattern ID，pattern数目为一个周期内的非TDM时隙的整数倍。例如，一个配置周期内有4个非TDM时隙，则宿主基站配置8个pattern的编号，频域pattern的循环周期就是配置周期的两倍。
在又一种可能的实现方式中，宿主基站配置的pattern ID数目小于周期内的非TDM时隙数，此时没有被配置pattern ID的非TDM时隙默认回退为TDM时隙，也就是不进行资源频分。例如，一个配置周期内有3个非TDM时隙，宿主基站配置了2个patternID，那么只有前两个非TDM时隙可以配置频域pattern，第三个非TDM时隙则默认为不进行资源频分复用。
S1150，宿主基站向第一IAB节点发送物理层信令DCI(即，第四信息的一例)，用于指示DU的soft(S)资源是否可用；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的物理层信令DCI。
特别地，第一IAB节点的DU资源配置中的上行资源、下行资源、灵活资源。由于资源属性配置是逐资源类型进行的。一个符号的资源属性由以下条件确定：所属时隙的属性配置和该符号的资源类型。例如，一个时隙可具有如下TDD传输方向配置：{上行(uplink，UL)符号，下行(downlink，DL)符号，灵活(flexible)符号}。
宿主donor节点为IAB节点提供多套资源属性配置，而多套资源属性配置分别关联与多套资源配置。例如，donor节点为IAB节点提供第一资源属性配置和第二资源属性配置，该第一资源属性配置和第二资源属性配置分别与第一资源类型配置和第二资源类型配置相关联。若donor节点为IAB节点的上级节点提供了IAB节点DU的多套DU资源配置，则上级节点需要获知IAB节点的资源属性配置与资源类型配置的关联关系。该关联关系可以由donor节点为上级节点提供，也可以由IAB节点上报上级节点。
由于一个时隙中含有多个OFDM符号，每个OFDM符号可以用于上行，也可以用于下行，IAB节点DU的soft资源的可用性需要由上级节点指示，上级节点对soft资源可用性的指示也是逐时隙逐资源类型进行的。因此，宿主节点可以为IAB节点DU的一个时隙定义如下8种可用状态中的一个或多个，每种情况可以基于3个比特进行指示，用于指示一个时隙内所有或部分传输方向的符号可用，或者不指示可用(no indication of availablity)。需要说明的是，不指示可用不同于不可用，这里没有限制子节点IAB DU在该资源上不可用，协议的要求是IAB DU在该资源上的传输或不传输，不影响共站的IAB MT使用该资源。
具体地，表4(即，第一关系的一例)示出了资源可用性元素的值与时隙可用性类soft资源类型之间的映射关系，如表4所示，value值为0表示所有soft资源不指示可用；value值为3表示上行和下行资源指示可用，且灵活资源不指示可用等。
表4
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000005
在本申请实施例中，可以继续使用表4所示的DCI信令对S资源进行指示。另外，还可以对其新增定义，即上述表4中已有的DCI信令用于指示非TDM时隙上频域S资源的可用性。应理解，协议对S符号或时隙的指示，对于整个带宽都生效。在本申请实施例中，对于部分存在频分的时隙或符号，上述可用性指示只对该时隙或符号中，频域上标识为S的资源生效。
综上所述，在上述实施例中，首先通过配置时域H/S/NA资源，再配置或预定义频域pattern的H/S/NA资源，在周期性的部分时隙上映射频域pattern，最后根据DCI信令对频域S资源是否可用进一步指示。主要区别体现在新增加的频域资源H/S/NA的pattern配置 和定义，以及通过协议规定的或新增的DCI信令指示频域的S资源是否可用。通过预定义频域pattern并指示的方法，避免了配置冗余复杂，降低信令开销。
图15是适用本申请的IAB资源频分与指示方法的又一例示意图，主要涉及对于部分进行频分的时隙，通过pattern动态指示具体频分资源的数量。该具体实现方式和上述实施例中方法1100的主要区别在于通过设计新的DCI信令，指示多个非TDM时隙的DU频域资源的可用性。需要说明的是，该方法1500可以用于上述方法1100的步骤S1150中对于S资源的动态指示，某种程度上两种方案可以叠加使用，本申请对此不作具体限定。如图15所示，实现步骤1500包括：
S1510，宿主基站(即，网络设备的一例)确定时域H/S/NA资源配置，并向第一IAB节点(即，第一节点的一例)的DU的每个小区cell发送时域H/S/NA资源配置；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的时域H/S/NA资源配置。
示例性的，宿主基站的CU向DU发送信令，用于指示小区时域资源的配置。具体的信令格式可以参照标准3GPP协议TS 38.473规定，此处不再赘述。因此，DU的每个小区会被配置时域的H资源，S资源，以及NA资源。第一节点的DU根据资源配置与下级节点(例如，终端设备)进行通信，具体实现与上述方法1100中S1110类似，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
S1520，宿主基站向第一IAB节点的DU的每个cell发送配置信息(即，第三信息的一例)，该配置信息用于指示非TDM时隙(即，第一时隙的一例)的资源配置；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的配置信息。
其中，非TDM时隙(或称为FDM时隙)仅仅是支持一个功能，该功能可以为部分时隙配置频分资源配置。应理解，只要支持该功能的时隙均在保护范围内，本申请对该时隙的名称不作具体限定。
一种可能的实现方式，在时域上配置部分时隙为非TDM时隙(slot)。其中，对于TDM时隙，上述步骤S1110配置的时域H/S/NA资源仍然适用；对于非TDM时隙，则需要进一步根据频域资源H/S/NA pattern，确定其中每一段频域资源是否可用。
另一种可能的实现方式，可以配置在一个时域周期内的部分时隙，为非TDM时隙。
示例性的，可以与时域H/S/NA配置的周期绑定，即在该周期的内某些时隙为非TDM时隙；或者，单独配置一个周期，单位为时隙数，或绝对时间(例如秒，或毫秒)；又或者，以一个系统帧(10ms)为一个周期，配置直接指示其中部分时隙为非TDM时隙。
又一种可能的实现方式，默认所有时域S(是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示)时隙都是潜在的非TDM时隙。
示例性的，图16示出的是部分时域资源配置为非TDM时隙(或FDM时隙)的一例示意图，如图16所示，时域上第2、3、9、10时隙别配置为FDM时隙。
上述几种可能的实现方式与上述方法1100中S1140类似，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
S1530，宿主基站向第一IAB节点发送第二配置信息(即，第五信息的一例)，该配置信息用于指示DU cell频域资源分段的配置；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的频域资源分段的配置信息。
一种可能的实现方式，可以半静态地，将DU的小区cell的频域资源细分为多段。即通过高层信令(RRC或者F1-AP信令)，对cell的频域资源进行分段。
进一步的，可以允许为每个需要进行频分复用的时隙或符号，配置不同的分段大小。
示例性的，图17示出的是对小区频分复用的时隙或符号进行频域分段的一例示意图，如图17所示，将cell频分时隙进行分段，例如频域资源划分为3段，分别是RBG 1、RBG 2和RBG 3，可选地，对于非频分时隙可以看做是同样分成了3段，也可以看做是没有分组，这并不会对非频分时隙的资源产生影响，本申请对频域资源组的大小不作具体限定。
需要说明的是，对于频域资源划分的粒度与方式，除了上述RBG，还可以是RB数，还可以是部分带宽BWP等等，本申请不作具体限定。
另一种可能的实现方式，可以半静态地，采用上述实施例一中的配置方法1100(例如，步骤S1120和S1140)，在部分时隙上(非TDM时隙)配置频分的资源H/S/NA。具体实现过程已经在上述步骤中说明，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
S1540，宿主基站向第一IAB节点发送DCI信令(即，第六信息的一例)，用于指示每一时隙的每一段频域资源的可用性；对应的，第一IAB节点接收来自宿主基站的DCI信令。
一种可能的实现方式，对于每个时隙，IAB DU的每一段频域资源可以通过DCI信令的0/1比特来指示可用或不可用。与DCI 2_5的设计类似，动态频域资源的DCI可以用一段连续的比特指示在某个DU的小区cell上，指示周期内的非TDM资源上每个时隙的频分资源可用性。具体指示已经在上述表4说明，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
示例性的，图18示出的是通过DCI信令指示频域资源是否可用的一例示意图，如图18所示，DU的小区cell X的频域资源被细分为3段，分别是RBG 1、RBG 2和RBG 3，则需要通过3个比特的DCI信令进一步指示。例如，DU的小区cell X针对FDM资源指示的DCI信令为001 010 011 010，那么FDM资源指示的起始位置对应的DCI信令就是001，称为频域资源配置1，3个比特的0/1分别对应RBG 1、RBG 2和RBG 3频域资源的可用性。其中，0用于指示频域资源不可用，或表示频域资源不指示可用，1用于指示频域资源可用。也就是说，RBG 1的频域资源不可用，RBG 2的频域资源不可用，RBG 3的频域资源可用。
应理解，如果DU的小区cell X的频域资源被细分为2段，那么通过两个比特的DCI信令就可以指示频域资源的可用性。
进一步的，本申请实施例也可以与H/S/NA结合，半静态配置频域资源H/S/NA，那么可以仅通过DCI信令的0/1比特指示频域S资源是否可用。示例性的，图18所示的小区cell X的频域资源被细分为3段，那么基于上述方法1100中步骤S1120中配置或预定义的频域资源H/S/NA的图案pattern，可以选择对应频域分为3段的pattern，仅通过1比特的DCI信令0/1进一步指示S资源是否可用即可。
另一种可能的实现方式，对于每个时隙，每一段频域资源可以通过DCI信令指示预定义的配置索引。
其中，预定义的配置索引包括对多个时隙/符号的资源指示。当子IAB节点收到该指示，则可以确定一个或多个时隙/符号上，DU的小区cell上S资源的可用性，该S资源包括频域上部分带宽为S的资源。具体实现步骤如下：
第一步，协议预定义一个对应表格，用于将指示的比特的值以及其含义相关联。
一种可能的实现方式，使用当前协议已经定义的表格，如上述表4所示，资源可用性 元素的值与时隙中S符号可用性类型之间的映射关系，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。也就是说，表4既可以用于配置soft时域资源可用指示性，也可以用于配置soft频域资源可用指示性。
另一种可能的实现方式，定义一种新的表格，可以指示包括频域资源可用性的更多的情况。由于对于一个时域上配置为soft的符号，可能存在频域H/S/NA，也可能存在不同的传输方向配置，因此需要指示的情况会更多。相应的，每种情况所需要的比特数可能也会更多。
示例性的，图19示出的是时域资源S的频域资源可用性的一例示意图。如图19所示，频域资源被分成3段，对应的属性分别为：频域资源不可用(NA)、是否可用依赖于上级节点的进一步指示(S)、一定可用(H)。
应理解，时域S的频域资源划分的带宽大小不限，且频域资源属性可以考虑H和/或S和/或NA，本申请对具体频域资源的划分情况不作限定。表5(即，第二关系的一例)示出了资源可用性元素的值与soft资源(包括时域和频域资源)可用性类型之间的映射关系，共定义了16种情况，每种情况可以基于4个比特进行指示，用于指示一个时隙内所有或部分传输方向的符号可用，或者不指示可用。其中，value值为0-7表示soft时域资源可用性的指示信息，value值为8-15表示soft频域资源可用性的指示信息。如表5所示，value值为0表示所有soft时域资源不指示可用；value值为9表示下行资源不指示可用；value值为14表示灵活资源指示可用，且上行、下行资源不指示可用等。
表5
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000007
应理解，表5仅仅是示例，实际可能有很多种表格的定义形式，在此不一一列举。但核心思想是指示S资源的可用性，除了考虑传输方向UL、DL、Flexible之外，还可以考虑频域资源H/S/NA，或者只考虑部分时域资源，例如频域H和S资源的可用性。
第二步，宿主基站通过高层信令(例如，RRC信令)配置多个指示集合。
其中，一个集合中包括第一步预定义的表格中的多个值，每个值依次指示一串需要被指示的时隙资源的可用性，即一个数值对应一个时隙资源，对多个指示集合进行编号标识。例如，1、2、3、…、N。应理解，指示集合中的数字，即为表格中的value列。在实际配置中，也可以换算为二进制进行配置，只要能够保证资源可用性元素的值与时隙中S符号可用性类型之间的映射关系一一对应即可。
示例性的，指示集合配置如下所示：
{集合ID：1
2，3，3，6，7，3，6，…
}
{集合ID：2
4，3，5，6，2，6，9，2，2，…
}
…
{集合ID：N
5，7，3，2，5，7，3，…
}
具体地，对于集合ID：1来说，对应表5所示的资源可用性元素的值与时隙中S符号可用性类型之间的映射关系，第一时隙对应数字2，即‘0010’，用于指示上行链路的S符号指示可用；第二、三、六时隙对应数字3，即‘0011’，用于指示中上行链路和下行链路的S符号指示可用；第四、七时隙对应数字6，即‘0110’，用于指示上行链路和灵活性的S符号指示可用，下行链路的S符号指示不可用；第五时隙对应的数字7，即‘0111’，用于指示上行、下行链路和灵活性的S符号指示可用等。
应理解，在具体实现过程中，还包括以下两种情况：
(1)配置的指示集合仅有一种类型，也就是说，所有指示集合包括的ID拥有统一的范围。那么，该指示集合可以仅基于目前协议定义的表格，如表4，只能指示时隙S上DL，UL，Flexible的资源可用性；或者该指示集合可以仅基于新定义的表格，如表5，只能指示时隙S上DL，UL，Flexible的频域资源H/S/NA的可用性。
(2)两种配置集合都可能存在，也就是说，基站既可以通过DCI指示一个时隙的时域资源是否可用(即不频分)，也可以指示一个时隙的具体频域资源是否可用(即进行频分)。
但是，考虑到频域配置的指示集合与现有标准协议的时域配置的指示集合共存的问题，本申请还提出以下几种可能的实现方式。
图24是适用本申请的无线通信方法的又一例示意图。具体包括如下几个步骤。
S2410，网络设备向第一节点发送配置信息。
对应的，第一节点接收来自网络设备的配置信息。
其中，配置信息用于指示资源的可用性，所述配置信息包括多个指示集合的标识信息，每个指示集合包括多个时域资源和/或频域资源可用性的指示；
S2420，第一节点根据所述配置信息确定所述频域资源和/或所述时域资源的可用性。
一种可能的实现方式，所述频域资源可用性的指示包括至少一个RB集合组的资源可用性指示，每个RB集合组包括至少一个时隙的RB集合组资源的可用性指示。
另一种可能的实现方式，所述频域资源可用性的指示包括至少一个时隙的资源可用性指示，所述至少一个时隙包括第一时隙，所述第一时隙还包括至少一个RB集合组资源的可用性指示。
又一种可能的实现方式，所述多个指示集合包括第一指示集合和第二指示集合，所述第一指示集合与所述时域资源对应，所述第二指示集合与所述频域资源可用性的指示对应，所述第一指示集合的标识信息和所述第二指示集合的标识信息不同。
具体地，作为一种示例，设计一种新的资源可用性指示配置，用于同时支持时分资源的可用性指示和频分资源的可用性指示。
可选的，如果IABMT被配置了用于频分资源可用性指示配置，则IABMT不期望收到或不使用已收到的仅用于时分资源可用性指示配置。其中，所述可用性指示配置包括可用性指示的集合ID(AvailabilityCombinationId)，每个ID包括一个或多个资源可用性指示(resourceAvailability)。所述资源可用性指示可以是用于时分资源的可用性指示，也可以是用于频分资源的可用性指示。具体地，若所述可用性指示为用于时分资源的可用性指示，则所述可用性指示的取值Value用于确定Soft时隙资源的可用性。若所述可用性指示为用于频分资源的可用性指示，则所述可用性指示为包括一个或多个取值Value的序列，该序列中的每一个取值Value用于指示一个时隙内至少一个soft频域资源的可用性，所述soft频域资源可以为一个或多RB集合(RB set)，或一个或多个RB集合组(RB set group)。
可选的，如果IABMT被配置了用于频分资源可用性指示配置，则可以通过配置或者协议预定义的规则，确定时分资源的可用性。例如，仅配置可支持频分资源的rbSetGroups信元。该信元包括至少一个RB set group的资源可用性指示，还可以包括RB set group的数量。具体地，当配置RB set group的数量为1时，资源可用性指示可以理解为用于指示相应时隙的所有频域资源的可用性，也就是说，可以实现对一个时隙的soft频域资源的可用性指示。再例如，通过协议约束。对于配置用于时分资源的可用性指示时，RB set group的数量被配置为1。又例如，通过协议预定义。若一个时分资源的时隙被配置了多个资源可用性指示，则该时分资源的可用性指示可以基于第一个资源可用性指示确定对应的多个RB set group。
可选的，若一个存在频分资源的soft时隙被配置或指示了一个时分资源的可用性指示，则可以理解为该时隙内所有soft频域资源(即RBsetgroup)均按照所配置的时分资源的可用性指示确定资源可用性。具体包括以下几种可能的实现方式。
方案一：每个频域资源，例如RB set group，分别指示一个或多个时隙的资源可用性。
第一种可能的配置信令形式如下所示：
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000008
其中，resourceAvailability-r17 choice表示选择采用时域资源可用性指示的方式或频域资源可用性指示的方式。rbSetGroups-r17可以是由多个RbSetGroup-r17组成的序列，每个RbSetGroup-r17包括该RbSetGroup-r17的频域资源可用性配置情况，即用于表示每个RB set group的资源可用性。maxNrofRbSetGroups-r17表示用于配置若干个(最大)RB set group的资源可用性，例如频域上最多可以分为8个RB set group。进一步，每个RbSetGroup-r17还包括RBsets的数量，以及其相应的在该时隙内的资源可用性情况，由resourceAvailability-r16配置。maxNrofResourceAvailabilityPerCombination-r16表示用于一个RB set group在时间上最大配置的资源可用性指示，INTEGER(0..7)可以表示一个RB set group在一个时隙的资源可用性指示，Value取值(0～7)的含义可参见上述表4，这里不再赘述。
第二种可能的配置信令形式如下所示：
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000010
其中，用于频分资源可用性指示的集合，以及用于时分资源可用性指示的集合均包括集合ID，频域RB set groups的资源可用性指示，以及maxNrofRbSetGroups表示最多可包括RB set groups数量的资源可用性指示。对于每个RB set group，进一步包括一个或多个时隙上该RB set group的资源可用性配置(由resourceAvailability进行配置)，以及每个RB set group所包括RB set的数量。
应理解，该配置信令与第一种配置信令的区别在于第二种方式可以通过不同大小的group数量相应的配置可用性指示，而第一种方法不同时隙的RB set group数相对不灵活。
第三种可能的配置信令形式如下所示：
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000012
其中，rbSetGroups-r17可以是由多个RbSetGroups-r17组成的序列，每个RbSetGroups-r17包括一个时隙上一个或多个RB set group的资源可用性配置情况。进一步，每个RbSetGroup-r17还包括RBsets的数量以及其相应的在该时隙内的资源可用性情况，由resourceAvailability-r16配置。maxNrofResourceAvailabilityPerCombination表示长度为时间上最大N个时隙。RbSetGroup-r17表示每个时隙上一个或多个RB set group的可用性配置。resourceAvailabilityRbSetGroup表示一个或多个Value的取值(0～7)。若有多个Value值，则每个值对应一个RB set group的资源可用性。maxNrofRbSetGroups表示最多为8个(0～7)的取值。maxNrofRbSets表示每个group的set数量。
方案二：每个时域资源，例如时隙，分别指示一个或多个RB set group上的资源可用性。即若存在频分，则每个时隙分别指示每个RB set group的资源可用性。
其中，配置资源可用性指示包括时域上多个时间资源的可用性指示，时间资源可以为时隙。对于其中任意一个时隙，若所述时隙为时分资源的时隙，则资源可用性指示为表4中的一个Value值，用于确定该时隙的资源可用性。对于其中任意一个时隙，若所述时隙为频分资源的时隙，则进一步包括一个或多个RB set group的资源可用性指示。对于其中任意一个RB set group的资源可用性指示，又进一步包括资源可用性指示的取值，所述取值为表4中的任意一个Value值。任意一个RB set group的资源可用性指示还可以包括所述RB set group的RB set数。具体的配置信令形式可以如下所示：
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000014
具体地，作为另一种示例，设计一种额外的资源可用性指示配置，用于支持频分资源的可用性指示。应理解，该配置独立于已有的时分资源的可用性指示(例如，表4)。在该方式中，时分资源的可用性指示和频分资源的可用性指示可以共用相同的availabilityCombinationId集合，即一个DCI信令既可以指示时分时隙的资源可用性，又可以指示频分时隙的资源可用性。
具体地，可以将时分资源的可用性指示和频分资源的可用性指示配置不同的availabilityCombinationId。也就是说，一个availabilityCombinationId仅用于配置时分资源可用性或频分资源可用性。在该配置信令中，时分资源的可用性配置和频分资源的可用性配置可以是独立的，且均包括一个availabilityCombinationId，具体实现方式如下：
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2022085193-appb-000016
其中，上述“资源可用性指示”可以是“先频域后时域”的指示方式。例如，假设有4个资源可用性指示{a,b,c,d}，用于指示两个soft时隙的资源可用性，a,b,c,d的取值分别为Value值(0～7)中的一个，每个soft时隙资源又可以进一步分为两个RB集合组(RBsetgroup)。此时，可以认为该4个资源可用性指示中的{a,b}用于指示第一个soft时隙的两个RBsetgroup的soft频域资源是否可用，{c,d}用于指示第二个soft时隙的两个RBsetgroup的soft频域资源是否可用。
需要说明的是，上述“资源可用性指示”的映射方法更易于与现有的时域资源可用性指示(例如，表4)共存，即资源可用性指示不论该soft时隙是否为频分时隙，都是逐时隙进行的。
应理解，上述配置信令中的信元名称仅是示例性说明，本申请对此不做具体限定。
需要说明的是，以上提供的几种可能的实现方式仅是示例性说明，不应构成对本申请技术方案的任何限定。
上述所揭示的方法，通过配置和定义多个频域资源可用性指示，避免现有技术中频分资源的配置过于冗余复杂，能够减少信令开销，进而提升系统性能。特别是针对频域配置指示和时域配置的指示集合共存的问题，提供多种可能实现的资源可用性指示配置，避免时域资源和频域资源可用性指示的混乱和干扰，并且可以基于统一的信令框架对时分的资源和频分的资源配置可用性指示配置。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中所涉及的资源块组可以替换为资源块集合或资源块集合列表(list)或资源块集合组，本申请对此不作具体限定。因此，频域资源块组可以替换为频域资源块集合或频域资源块集合列表(list)或频域资源块集合组，时域资源类似。
对于一个DU cell来说，部分时隙可以配置频分资源，部分时隙可以配置时分资源，本申请所揭示的资源可用性指示既可以配置频分资源，也可以配置时分资源。
第三步，上级节点(例如，宿主基站)向IAB节点发送DCI信令(即，第七信息的一例)，该第七信息包括至少一个指示集合的标识信息，用于指示至少一个目标指示集合；对应的，IAB节点接收来自上级节点的DCI信令。
其中，DCI信令承载上述配置的指示集合ID，指示下级DU在多个非TDM时隙的资源可用性。需要说明的是，此处发送的DCI信令包括的是集合的索引值，即集合ID。
综上所述，在上述实施例中，首先通过配置时域H/S/NA资源，再将频域资源分为多段，最后通过DCI信令指示每一段频域资源是否可用。主要区别体现在：通过设计新的DCI信令，进一步指示每个需要频分时隙的DU可用资源，避免了配置冗余复杂，进而降低信令开销。
上文结合图10至图19，详细描述了本申请实施例提供的资源配置的方法侧实施例，下面将结合图20至图23，详细描述本申请的装置侧实施例。应理解，方法实施例的描述与装置实施例的描述相互对应，因此，未详细描述的部分可以参见前面方法实施例。
根据前述方法，图20是适用于本申请实施例的通信装置10的示意图。可以理解的是，该通信装置10可以是网络设备(例如，宿主基站)。如图20所示，该通信装置10包括：收发单元11和处理单元12。
示例地，该收发单元11用于发送第一信息，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；
该处理单元12用于根据该第一图案确定网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信的资源，该第一节点是中继节点。
该收发单元11还用于网络设备与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信。网络节点与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信的资源可以位于处理单元12所确定出来的资源。
可选地，该收发单元11还用于发送第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源。
可选地，该处理单元12还用于在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案确定与该第一节点和/或该终端设备进行通信的资源。
可选地，该收发单元11还用于在第一时域资源，网络设备与该第一节点和/或该终端设备进行通信。
应理解，通信装置10可以对应于根据本申请实施例的方法1000/1100/1500中的网络设备(宿主基站)，该通信装置10可以包括用于执行图10/图11/图15中网络设备(宿主基站)执行的方法的模块(或单元)。并且，该通信装置10中的各模块(或单元)和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现方法1000/1100/1500的相应流程。
示例地，收发单元11用于执行方法1000/1100/1500的S1010和S1020，或者S1110、S1120、S1130、S1140和S1150，或者S1510、S1520、S1530和S1540中由网络设备(例如，宿主基站)执行的动作。各模块(或单元)执行上述相应步骤的过程在方法1000/1100/1500中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
应理解，图20示例的装置10的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的网络设备的可能。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的通信装置10可对应于前述方法实施例的网络设备(宿主基站)，并且通信装置10中的各个模块(或单元)的上述和其它管理操作和/或功能分别为了实现前述各个方法的相应步骤，因此也可以实现前述方法实施例中的有益效果。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块(或单元)可以由处理器实现，收发模块(或单元)可以由收发器实现。
根据前述方法，图21是适用于本申请实施例的通信装置20的示意图。可以理解的是，该通信装置10可以是第一节点，也可以是可用于第一节点的部件(例如，第一IAB节点)，又或者是终端设备(例如，UE)。如图21所示，该通信装置20包括：收发单元21和处 理单元22。
示例地，该收发单元21用于接收第一信息，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；
该处理单元22用于根据该第一图案确定与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信的资源。
该收发单元21还用于第一节点与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信。网络节点与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信的资源可以位于处理单元22所确定出来的资源。
可选地，该处理单元22还用于在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案确定与该第二网络设备和/或该终端设备进行通信的资源。
可选地，该收发单元21还用于接收第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源。
可选地，该收发单元21还用于在第一时域资源，第一节点与该第二网络设备和/或该终端设备进行通信。
应理解，通信装置20可以对应于根据本申请实施例的方法1000/1100/1500中的第一节点(第一IAB节点)，该通信装置20可以包括用于执行图10/图11/图15中的第一节点(第一IAB节点)执行的方法的模块(或单元)。并且，该通信装置20中的各模块(或单元)和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现方法1000/1100/1500的相应流程。
示例地，收发单元11用于执行方法1000/1100/1500的S1010和S1020，或者S1110、S1120、S1130、S1140和S1150，或者S1510、S1520、S1530和S1540中由第一节点和/或终端设备执行的动作。各模块(或单元)执行上述相应步骤的过程在方法1000/1100/1500中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
应理解，图21示例的装置20的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的中继节点或终端设备的可能。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的通信装置20可对应于前述方法实施例的第一节点(第一IAB节点)，并且通信装置20中的各个模块(或单元)的上述和其它管理操作和/或功能分别为了实现前述各个方法的相应步骤，因此也可以实现前述方法实施例中的有益效果。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块(或单元)可以由处理器实现，收发模块(或单元)可以由收发器实现。
根据前述方法，图22为本申请实施例提供的通信装置(也可以称为网络设备)30的示意图，如图22所示，该装置30可以为网络设备(例如，宿主基站)，也可以为芯片或电路，比如可设置于网络设备的芯片或电路。
该装置30可以包括处理器31(即，处理单元的一例)和存储器32。该存储器32用于存储指令，该处理器31用于执行该存储器32存储的指令，以使该装置30实现上述方法(例如，方法1000或方法1100或方法1500)中网络设备(例如，宿主基站)执行的步骤。
可选地，该装置30还可以包括输入口33(即，通信单元的一例)和输出口34(即， 通信单元的另一例)。应理解，该处理器31、存储器32、输入口33和输出口34可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信号。
该存储器32用于存储计算机程序，该处理器31可以用于从该存储器32中调用并运行该计算计程序，以控制输入口33接收信号，控制输出口34发送信号，完成上述方法中网络设备的步骤。
该存储器32可以集成在处理器31中，也可以与处理器31分开设置。
可选地，若该装置30为网络设备，该输入口33为接收器，该输出口34为发送器。其中，接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时，可以统称为收发器。
可选地，若该装置30为芯片或电路，该输入口33为输入接口，该输出口34为输出接口。
作为一种实现方式，输入口33和输出口34的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理器31可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理器或者通用芯片实现。
作为另一种实现方式，可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的网络设备。即将实现处理器31、输入口33和输出口34功能的程序代码存储在存储器32中，通用处理器通过执行存储器32中的代码来实现处理器31、输入口33和输出口34的功能。
在本申请实施例中，该输出口34用于发送第一信息，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；
该处理器31用于根据该第一图案确定与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信的资源，该第一节点是中继节点。
可选地，该输出口34还用于发送第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源。
可选地，该处理器31还用于在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案确定与该第一节点和/或该终端设备进行通信的资源。
可选地，该装置30配置在或本身即为网络设备，例如宿主基站。
其中，以上列举的装置30中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明，装置30中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法1000或1100或1500中由网络设备(例如，宿主基站)所执行的各动作或处理过程，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。
例如，输出口34用于执行方法1000/1100/1500的S1010和S1020，或者S1110、S1120、S1130、S1140和S1150，或者S1510、S1520、S1530和S1540中由网络设备(例如，宿主基站)所执行的各动作或处理过程。
该装置30所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念，解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述，此处不做赘述。
在一种可能的实施方式中，随着片上系统(System-on-chip，SoC)技术的发展，装置30的全部或者部分功能由SoC技术实现，例如由一网络设备功能芯片实现，该网络设备 功能芯片集成了处理器、存储器、通信接口等器件，网络设备相关功能的程序存储在存储器中，由处理器执行程序以实现基站的相关功能。可选地，该网络设备功能芯片也能够读取该芯片外部的存储器以实现基站的相关功能。
应理解，图22示例的装置30的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的基站结构的可能。
根据前述方法，图23为本申请实施例提供的通信装置(也可以称为中继设备或终端设备)40的示意图，如图23所示，该装置40可以为第一节点(例如，第一IAB节点)，或者是可用于第一节点的部件，又或者是终端设备(例如，UE)，也可以为芯片或电路，比如可设置于中继设备或终端设备的芯片或电路。
该装置40可以包括处理器41(即，处理单元的一例)和存储器42。该存储器42用于存储指令，该处理器41用于执行该存储器42存储的指令，以使该装置40实现上述方法(例如，方法1000或方法1100或方法1500)中第一节点(例如，第一IAB节点)执行的步骤。
可选地，该装置40还可以包括输入口43(即，通信单元的一例)和输出口44(即，通信单元的另一例)。应理解，该处理器41、存储器42、输入口43和输出口44可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信号。
该存储器42用于存储计算机程序，该处理器41可以用于从该存储器42中调用并运行该计算计程序，以控制输入口43接收信号，控制输出口44发送信号，完成上述方法中网络设备的步骤。
该存储器42可以集成在处理器41中，也可以与处理器41分开设置。
可选地，若该装置40为中继设备或终端设备，该输入口43为接收器，该输出口44为发送器。其中，接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时，可以统称为收发器。
可选地，若该装置40为芯片或电路，该输入口43为输入接口，该输出口44为输出接口。
作为一种实现方式，输入口43和输出口44的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理器41可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理器或者通用芯片实现。
作为另一种实现方式，可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的第一节点(例如，第一IAB节点)。即将实现处理器41、输入口43和输出口44功能的程序代码存储在存储器42中，通用处理器通过执行存储器42中的代码来实现处理器41、输入口43和输出口44的功能。
在本申请实施例中，该输入口43用于接收第一信息，该第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，该第一图案是多个图案中的一个，该多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，该至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，该第一资源是一定可用的资源，该第二资源是不可用的资源，该第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，该第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；
该处理器41用于根据该第一图案确定与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信的资源。
可选地，该处理器41还用于在第一时域资源，根据该第一图案确定与该第二网络设备和/或该终端设备进行通信的资源。
可选地，该输入口43还用于接收第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该第一时域资源
可选地，该装置40配置在或本身即为中继设备，第一节点(例如，第一IAB节点)，或者是终端设备(例如，UE)。
其中，以上列举的装置40中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明，装置40中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法1000或1100或1500中第一节点(例如，第一IAB节点)所执行的各动作或处理过程，这里，为了避免赘述，省略其详细说明。
例如，输入口43可以执行上述方法1000/1100/1500的S1010和S1020，或者S1110、S1120、S1130、S1140和S1150，或者S1510、S1520、S1530和S1540中由第一节点(例如，第一IAB节点)执行的动作。
该装置40所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念，解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述，此处不做赘述。
在一种可能的实施方式中，随着片上系统(System-on-chip，SoC)技术的发展，装置40的全部或者部分功能由SoC技术实现，例如由一终端设备功能芯片实现，该终端设备功能芯片集成了处理器、存储器、通信接口等器件，终端设备相关功能的程序存储在存储器中，由处理器执行程序以实现用户设备的相关功能。可选地，该终端设备功能芯片也能够读取该芯片外部的存储器以实现用户设备的相关功能。
应理解，图23示例的装置40的结构仅为一种可能的形态，而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的用户设备结构的可能。
应理解，本申请实施例中，该处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
上述实施例，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行该计算机指令或 计算机程序时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例该的流程或功能。该计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。该计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，该计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。该计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。该可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。
应理解，本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
还应理解，本文提及的“第一”和“第二”等等仅仅是为了更清楚地表述本申请的技术方案而加以区分，不应对本申请构成任何限定。
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如，部件可以是但不限于，在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示，在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中，部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外，这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据，例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件 可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
该功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (40)

  1. 一种无线通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一信息，所述第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，所述第一图案是多个图案中的一个，所述多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，所述至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，所述第一资源是一定可用的资源，所述第二资源是不可用的资源，所述第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，所述第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；
    根据所述第一图案与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述第一图案与第二网络设备和/或终端设备进行通信，包括：
    在第一时域资源，根据所述第一图案与所述第二网络设备和/或所述终端设备进行通信。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一时域资源。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述每个图案的配置包括所述至少一种资源的频域资源带宽，所述每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，任意两个图案标识信息不同。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述每个图案的配置还包括所述至少一种资源的频域资源属性，所述每一频域资源属性为所述第一资源、所述第二资源、所述第三资源中的一种。
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述频域资源带宽的配置包括所述至少一种资源的起始资源块编号和所述至少一种资源的资源块数目，其中，所述频域资源带宽是宿主网络设备配置的，或所述频域资源带宽是协议预定义的。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括至少一个图案集合的标识信息，所述至少一个图案集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标图案集合，所述至少一个目标图案集合包括所述第一图案，其中，每个图案集合的配置包括所述多个图案中的至少一个图案，所述每个图案集合具有对应的图案集合标识信息，任意两个图案集合的标识信息不同。
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第三信息，所述第三信息用于配置至少一个第一时隙；
    在所述至少一个第一时隙上映射至少一个所述第一图案。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一时隙是第一时域周期内的时隙，或者所述第一时隙是第一时域周期内时域资源为第四资源所对应的时隙，其中，所述第一时域周期与所述第一时域资源配置的周期对应，所述第四资源是否可用由第二指示信息确定，所述第二指示信息是所述第一网络设备发送的。
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个图案的数目与所述 第一时隙的数目相同，或者所述至少一个图案的数目是所述第一时隙的数目的正整数倍，或者所述至少一个图案的数目小于所述第一时隙的数目。
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第四信息，所述第四信息用于指示所述第三资源的资源可用性。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四信息还用于指示所述第四资源的资源可用性。
  13. 根据权利要求8至12中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述第一时隙对应的频域资源的分组信息；
    接收第六信息，所述第六消息用于指示至少一个频域资源组的资源属性。
  14. 根据权利要求8至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    获取第一关系和/或第二关系，所述第一关系是第一参数和第一资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，所述第一关系用于指示第一时隙的资源可用性，所述第二关系是第二参数和第二资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，所述第二关系用于指示第一时隙的频域资源的资源可用性；
    根据所述第一关系和/或所述第二关系确定所述第一图案。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第七信息，所述第七信息包括至少一个指示集合的标识信息，所述至少一个指示集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标指示集合，所述至少一个目标指示集合包括所述第一参数和/或所述第二参数，其中，任意两个指示集合的标识信息不同；
    根据所述至少一个目标指示集合确定至少一个第一时隙的一个或多个频域资源的资源属性。
  16. 一种无线通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送第一信息，所述第一信息包括第一图案的指示信息，所述第一图案是多个图案中的一个，所述多个图案中的每个图案用于指示至少一种资源在频域上的分布，所述至少一种资源包括以下资源中的至少一种：第一资源、第二资源、第三资源，所述第一资源是一定可用的资源，所述第二资源是不可用的资源，所述第三资源是否可用由第一指示信息确定，所述第一指示信息是第一网络设备发送的，其中，任意两个图案所指示的资源分布不同；
    根据所述第一图案与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信，所述第一节点是中继节点。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述第一图案与第一节点和/或终端设备进行通信，包括：
    在第一时域资源，根据所述第一图案与所述第一节点和/或所述终端设备进行通信。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一时域资源。
  19. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述每个图案的配置包括所述至少一种资源的频域资源带宽，所述每个图案具有对应的图案标识信息，任意两个图案标识信息不同。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述每个图案的配置还包括所述至少一种资源的频域资源属性，所述每一频域资源属性为所述第一资源、所述第二资源、所 述第三资源中的一种。
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述频域资源带宽的配置包括所述至少一种资源的起始资源块编号和所述至少一种资源的资源块数目，其中，所述频域资源带宽是宿主网络设备配置的，或所述频域资源带宽是协议预定义的。
  22. 根据权利要求16至21中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括至少一个图案集合的标识信息，所述至少一个图案集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标图案集合，所述至少一个目标图案集合包括所述第一图案，其中，每个图案集合的配置包括所述多个图案中的至少一个图案，所述每个图案集合具有对应的图案集合标识信息，任意两个图案集合的标识信息不同。
  23. 根据权利要求16至22中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第三信息，所述第三信息用于配置至少一个第一时隙；
    在所述至少一个第一时隙上映射至少一个所述第一图案。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一时隙是第一时域周期内的时隙，或者所述第一时隙是第一时域周期内时域资源为第四资源所对应的时隙，其中，所述第一时域周期与所述第一时域资源配置的周期对应，所述第四资源是否可用由第二指示信息确定，所述第二指示信息是所述第一网络设备发送的。
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个图案的数目与所述第一时隙的数目相同，或者所述至少一个图案的数目是所述第一时隙的数目的正整数倍，或者所述至少一个图案的数目小于所述第一时隙的数目。
  26. 根据权利要求16至25中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第四信息，所述第四信息用于指示所述第三资源的资源可用性。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四信息还用于指示所述第四资源的资源可用性。
  28. 根据权利要求23至27中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第五信息，所述第五信息用于指示所述第一时隙对应的频域资源的分组信息；
    发送第六信息，所述第六消息用于指示至少一个频域资源组的资源属性。
  29. 根据权利要求23至28中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    获取第一关系和/或第二关系，所述第一关系是第一参数和第一资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，所述第一关系用于指示第一时隙的资源可用性，所述第二关系是第二参数和第二资源可用性的指示信息之间的对应关系，所述第二关系用于指示第一时隙的频域资源的资源可用性；
    根据所述第一关系和/或所述第二关系确定所述第一图案。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    发送第七信息，所述第七信息包括至少一个指示集合的标识信息，所述至少一个指示集合的标识信息用于确定至少一个目标指示集合，所述至少一个目标指示集合包括所述第一参数和/或所述第二参数，其中，任意两个指示集合的标识信息不同；
    根据所述至少一个目标指示集合确定至少一个第一时隙的一个或多个频域资源的资源属性。
  31. 一种无线通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收配置信息，所述配置信息用于指示资源的可用性，所述配置信息包括多个指示集合的标识信息，每个指示集合包括多个时域资源和/或频域资源可用性的指示；
    根据所述配置信息确定所述频域资源和/或所述时域资源的可用性。
  32. 一种无线通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    发送配置信息，所述配置信息用于指示资源的可用性，所述配置信息包括多个指示集合的标识信息，每个指示集合包括多个时域资源和/或频域资源可用性的指示；
    根据所述配置信息确定所述频域资源和/或所述时域资源的可用性。
  33. 根据权利要求31或32所述的方法，其特征在于，所述频域资源可用性的指示包括至少一个RB集合组的资源可用性指示，每个RB集合组包括至少一个时隙的RB集合组资源的可用性指示。
  34. 根据权利要求31或32所述的方法，其特征在于，所述频域资源可用性的指示包括至少一个时隙的资源可用性指示，所述至少一个时隙包括第一时隙，所述第一时隙还包括至少一个RB集合组资源的可用性指示。
  35. 根据权利要求31至34中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述多个指示集合包括第一指示集合和第二指示集合，所述第一指示集合与所述时域资源对应，所述第二指示集合与所述频域资源可用性的指示对应，所述第一指示集合的标识信息和所述第二指示集合的标识信息不同。
  36. 一种无线通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    用于实现权利要求1至15、31、33至35中任一项所述的方法的单元。
  37. 一种无线通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    用于实现权利要求16至30、32、33至35中任一项所述的方法的单元。
  38. 一种无线通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合；所述处理器，用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置执行如权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法；或者，以使得所述装置执行如权利要求16至30中任一项所述的方法。
  39. 一种无线通信系统，其特征在于，包括：
    如权利要求1至15、31、33至35中任一项所述的第一节点和/或终端设备；或者
    如权利要求16至30、32、33至35中任一项所述的网络设备。
  40. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，包括：
    所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序运行时，
    使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至15、31、33至35中任一项所述的方法；或者
    使得所述计算机执行如权利要求16至30、32、33至35中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/085193 2021-04-02 2022-04-02 无线通信方法和装置 Ceased WO2022207002A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2023560649A JP2024513055A (ja) 2021-04-02 2022-04-02 無線通信方法及び装置
BR112023019872A BR112023019872A2 (pt) 2021-04-02 2022-04-02 Método e aparelho de comunicação sem fio
EP22779182.9A EP4307805A4 (en) 2021-04-02 2022-04-02 METHOD AND DEVICE FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
KR1020237037223A KR102949882B1 (ko) 2021-04-02 2022-04-02 무선 통신 방법 및 장치
US18/475,448 US20240032004A1 (en) 2021-04-02 2023-09-27 Wireless communication method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110363709.8 2021-04-02
CN202110363709.8A CN115190606A (zh) 2021-04-02 2021-04-02 无线通信方法和装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/475,448 Continuation US20240032004A1 (en) 2021-04-02 2023-09-27 Wireless communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022207002A1 true WO2022207002A1 (zh) 2022-10-06

Family

ID=83458120

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/085193 Ceased WO2022207002A1 (zh) 2021-04-02 2022-04-02 无线通信方法和装置

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (1) US20240032004A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4307805A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP2024513055A (zh)
KR (1) KR102949882B1 (zh)
CN (1) CN115190606A (zh)
BR (1) BR112023019872A2 (zh)
WO (1) WO2022207002A1 (zh)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024255538A1 (zh) * 2023-06-16 2024-12-19 华为技术有限公司 一种基于配置授权的通信方法及装置
WO2025091380A1 (zh) * 2023-11-02 2025-05-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 指示方法、装置以及存储介质

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN119300145A (zh) * 2023-07-04 2025-01-10 华为技术有限公司 资源指示方法及装置
US20250056373A1 (en) * 2023-08-09 2025-02-13 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Method and system for integrated access backhaul sharing among co-located radio sites

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111083740A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2020-04-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 确定资源的方法及装置、存储介质和电子装置
CN111698778A (zh) * 2019-03-15 2020-09-22 华为技术有限公司 指示资源的方法和装置
CN111901871A (zh) * 2020-04-09 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种资源配置方法、装置、通信节点及存储介质
WO2020236644A1 (en) * 2019-05-17 2020-11-26 Apple Inc. Resource configuration in an integrated access and backhaul network
WO2020262982A1 (ko) * 2019-06-28 2020-12-30 엘지전자 주식회사 Iab 노드에 대한 슬롯 포맷 설정 방법 및 장치
WO2021029817A1 (en) * 2019-08-15 2021-02-18 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Long term evolution-m resource reservation using bitmap
CN112867161A (zh) * 2021-01-13 2021-05-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 资源可用性确定、资源配置方法、通信节点及存储介质

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1855424B1 (en) * 2006-05-12 2013-07-10 Panasonic Corporation Reservation of radio resources for users in a mobile communications system
EP2503835A1 (en) * 2011-03-23 2012-09-26 Panasonic Corporation Resouce assignment for single and multiple cluster transmission
US10708907B2 (en) * 2016-04-19 2020-07-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Interference management with adaptive resource block allocation
US10708938B2 (en) * 2016-10-31 2020-07-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Transmission of UL control channels with dynamic structures

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111698778A (zh) * 2019-03-15 2020-09-22 华为技术有限公司 指示资源的方法和装置
WO2020236644A1 (en) * 2019-05-17 2020-11-26 Apple Inc. Resource configuration in an integrated access and backhaul network
WO2020262982A1 (ko) * 2019-06-28 2020-12-30 엘지전자 주식회사 Iab 노드에 대한 슬롯 포맷 설정 방법 및 장치
CN111083740A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2020-04-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 确定资源的方法及装置、存储介质和电子装置
WO2021029817A1 (en) * 2019-08-15 2021-02-18 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Long term evolution-m resource reservation using bitmap
CN111901871A (zh) * 2020-04-09 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种资源配置方法、装置、通信节点及存储介质
CN112867161A (zh) * 2021-01-13 2021-05-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 资源可用性确定、资源配置方法、通信节点及存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
3GPP STANDARD PROTOCOL TS 38.213
See also references of EP4307805A4

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024255538A1 (zh) * 2023-06-16 2024-12-19 华为技术有限公司 一种基于配置授权的通信方法及装置
WO2025091380A1 (zh) * 2023-11-02 2025-05-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 指示方法、装置以及存储介质

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR102949882B1 (ko) 2026-04-07
BR112023019872A2 (pt) 2023-12-05
KR20230165802A (ko) 2023-12-05
EP4307805A1 (en) 2024-01-17
JP2024513055A (ja) 2024-03-21
US20240032004A1 (en) 2024-01-25
CN115190606A (zh) 2022-10-14
EP4307805A4 (en) 2024-10-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110636616B (zh) 无线通信方法及装置
WO2022207002A1 (zh) 无线通信方法和装置
WO2020224306A1 (zh) 一种通信的方法和装置
CN116346546A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2018028570A1 (zh) 参考信号发送方法和参考信号发送装置
WO2018082544A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法和装置
CN116097812B (zh) 用于增强型配置授权的系统和方法
WO2024067617A1 (zh) 资源配置的方法及装置
JP7802979B2 (ja) アクセス・バックホール統合に基づいた通信方法及び装置
CN116250192B (zh) 用于实现增强的配置授权的移动设备和方法
CN117676890A (zh) 资源配置的方法和通信装置
WO2023188913A1 (ja) 基地局、端末及び通信方法
JP7723112B2 (ja) 通信方法および通信装置
CN117812737A (zh) 通信方法及通信装置
WO2019096273A1 (zh) 一种信息发送、接收的方法及装置
WO2022252211A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
CN115915407A (zh) 数据传输方法及装置
CN113273302B (zh) 无线通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2024011632A1 (zh) 资源配置方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN118921756A (zh) 一种通信方法、终端设备以及网络设备
US20260040335A1 (en) Sidelink communication method and apparatus
CN112399622B (zh) 一种控制信息的发送、接收方法和通信装置
JP2026513200A (ja) 通信方法、端末機器及びネットワーク機器
CN121645495A (zh) 一种通信方法及相关装置
CN119521127A (zh) S子帧自适应调度的方法和通信装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22779182

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023560649

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202337067506

Country of ref document: IN

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112023019872

Country of ref document: BR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2022779182

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022779182

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20231011

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20237037223

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 11202307396Q

Country of ref document: SG

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112023019872

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20230927

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 202337067506

Country of ref document: IN

WWR Wipo information: refused in national office

Ref document number: 1020237037223

Country of ref document: KR